JP6606776B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

  As such a gaming machine, there is one that displays an image showing the number of acquired balls every time the number of acquired balls in a big hit becomes a predetermined number (Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-75436 A

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 described above, the mode of notification effect is uniform and the interest of the game in the advantageous state is insufficient.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a game in an advantageous state.

(1) A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
There are multiple types of the above-mentioned advantageous states (15R probability variation big hit, 15R probability variation big hit, 5R positive change big hit, 5R normal big hit, etc.) with different advantages,
Notification effect means (production control microcomputer 100) for executing a notification effect (notification effect or the like by the first notification image 213 shown in FIG. 12) related to the number of game media (number of game balls or the like) given during the advantageous state. Etc.)
Information related to variable display (for example, the value of a random number for jackpot determination (random R), a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1), a random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2), and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3)) A hold storage means for storing as hold storage information (for example, a first hold storage buffer, a second hold storage buffer, etc.);
Hold display means for performing a hold display corresponding to the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means (for example, the part for executing step S3510 in the production control microcomputer 100);
Change means capable of changing the display mode of the on-hold display (for example, the portion for executing steps S635 and S3707 in the production control microcomputer 100),
The changing means is
Based on the fact that a specific number (for example, 8) of stored storage information is stored in the storage device, the first mode (for example, “white”) or the first mode is more advantageous to the player. The display mode of the hold display displayed in the second mode (for example, “blue”, “red”, etc.) can be changed to a specific mode (for example, “character”, etc.). By executing step S3707, the display mode of the hold display can be changed from “white” as the first mode or “blue” or “red” as the second mode to “character” as the specific mode. Yes),
The hold display displayed by the first mode (already displayed in the first mode (no change to the second mode), or the current status is not the first mode but will be changed to the first mode in the future. A pending display that is to be changed, for example, a pending display in which the display mode is “white” and the display mode will not change to “blue” or “red” in the future (change pattern type: first change pattern If the first mode is a gaming machine that is not used as the display mode after the change, there is “pending display scheduled to be changed to the first mode in the future” Is not displayed in the second mode (already displayed in the second mode (no planned change to the first mode)), or the current status is the second mode. Not pending but will be changed to the second mode in the future For example, a pending display whose display mode is already “blue” or “red”, or a pending display whose current status is “white” but whose display mode will change to “blue” or “red” in the future (changes) Pattern type: second change pattern type to seventh change pattern type)) can be changed to the specific mode (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the change mode of the hold display in the production mode A as a display pattern). The character change patterns (PT2B, 3B, 4B, 5B, 6B, 7B) in the second change pattern type to the seventh change pattern type can be selected at a higher rate than the character change pattern (PT1B) in the first change pattern type. (See FIGS. 58 and 61.)
The notification production means is
When the advantageous state is controlled to the first advantageous state (such as 15R probability variation big hit), the notification effect is executed,
When the second advantageous state (5R normal big hit or the like) different from the first advantageous state is controlled, the notification effect may not be executed .

  According to such a structure, the interest of the game in an advantageous state can be improved with the production | presentation according to the kind of advantageous state. In addition, the production effect can be improved. In addition, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

(2) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
There are multiple types of the above-mentioned advantageous states (15R probability variation big hit, 15R probability variation big hit, 5R positive change big hit, 5R normal big hit, etc.) with different advantages,
Accumulating storage means for accumulating and storing information relating to the number of game media granted during the advantageous state;
In a mode that does not include a mode for notifying the gaming state after the end of the advantageous state based on the fact that the information related to the number of gaming media (such as the number of gaming balls) stored in the cumulative storage means has become the specific information. Notification effect means (such as the effect control microcomputer 100) for executing a notification effect (notification effect or the like by the first notification image 213 shown in FIG. 12) for notifying that the specific information has been obtained ;
Information related to variable display (for example, the value of a random number for jackpot determination (random R), a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1), a random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2), and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3)) A hold storage means for storing as hold storage information (for example, a first hold storage buffer, a second hold storage buffer, etc.);
Hold display means for performing a hold display corresponding to the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means (for example, the part for executing step S3510 in the production control microcomputer 100);
Change means capable of changing the display mode of the on-hold display (for example, the portion for executing steps S635 and S3707 in the production control microcomputer 100),
The changing means is
Based on the fact that a specific number (for example, 8) of stored storage information is stored in the storage device, the first mode (for example, “white”) or the first mode is more advantageous to the player. The display mode of the hold display displayed in the second mode (for example, “blue”, “red”, etc.) can be changed to a specific mode (for example, “character”, etc.). By executing step S3707, the display mode of the hold display can be changed from “white” as the first mode or “blue” or “red” as the second mode to “character” as the specific mode. Yes),
The hold display displayed by the first mode (already displayed in the first mode (no change to the second mode), or the current status is not the first mode but will be changed to the first mode in the future. A pending display that is to be changed, for example, a pending display in which the display mode is “white” and the display mode will not change to “blue” or “red” in the future (change pattern type: first change pattern If the first mode is a gaming machine that is not used as the display mode after the change, there is “pending display scheduled to be changed to the first mode in the future” Is not displayed in the second mode (already displayed in the second mode (no planned change to the first mode)), or the current status is the second mode. Not pending but will be changed to the second mode in the future For example, a pending display whose display mode is already “blue” or “red”, or a pending display whose current status is “white” but whose display mode will change to “blue” or “red” in the future (changes) Pattern type: second change pattern type to seventh change pattern type)) can be changed to the specific mode (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the change mode of the hold display in the production mode A as a display pattern). The character change patterns (PT2B, 3B, 4B, 5B, 6B, 7B) in the second change pattern type to the seventh change pattern type can be selected at a higher rate than the character change pattern (PT1B) in the first change pattern type. (See FIGS. 58 and 61.)
The notification production means is
When the advantageous state is controlled to the first advantageous state (15R probability variation big hit or the like), the information related to the number of game media stored in the cumulative storage means becomes the specific information, thereby Performing the notification effect;
When the second advantageous state (5R normal big hit or the like) different from the first advantageous state is controlled, the information related to the number of game media stored in the cumulative storage means is the specific information. The notification effect in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode is executed.

  According to such a structure, the interest of the game in an advantageous state can be improved with the production | presentation according to the kind of advantageous state. In addition, the production effect can be improved. In addition, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The notification effect means executes the notification effect based on the fact that the number of game media granted during the advantageous state has reached a predetermined number (500, etc.) (executes the processing of S4950 to S4952 in FIG. 22). ).

  According to such a configuration, the entertainment of the game in the advantageous state can be improved by diversifying the notification effects.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3),
The second advantageous state has a lower advantage than the first advantageous state (the 5R normal big hit has less play than the 15R probability variable big hit and does not become a high probability state, so the advantage is low for the player) It may be a thing.

  According to such a structure, the interest of the game in an advantageous state can be improved with the kind of advantageous state.

(5) In the gaming machine of (1),
Variable winning means (special variable winning ball apparatus 20 or the like) that can change between a first state (open state, etc.) where game media (game balls, etc.) are easy to win and a second state (closed state, etc.) where game media are difficult to win. )When,
The variable winning means can be changed to the first state until at least one of a predetermined period (29 seconds or the like) elapses or a predetermined number of game media wins (10 or the like) is established. Advantageous state control means (steps S305 to S307 in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) by executing a unit game (round, etc.) a predetermined number of times (5 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.). Etc.)
High probability state control means (game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a high probability state (probability change state or the like) with a high ratio controlled to the advantageous state;
Specific production means (production control microcomputer 100, S4953 in FIG. 22 and the like) capable of executing a specific production (such as a probable change promotion production) that informs that it is controlled to the high probability state,
The advantageous state control means can be controlled to a third advantageous state (5R probability variable big hit etc.) which controls the variable winning means by an opening pattern common to the second advantageous state (5R normal big hit etc.),
The specific effect means is capable of executing the specific effect during the third advantageous state (can execute a probable promotion effect during 5R probable big hit, such as S4953 in FIG. 22),
The notification effect means may execute the notification effect (execution of the notification effect during 5R probability variation big hit, etc., S4952 in FIG. 22, etc.) while being controlled to the third advantageous state.

  According to such a structure, the interest of the game in an advantageous state can be improved with the production | presentation according to the kind of advantageous state.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5),
The high-probability state control means controls the high-probability state when controlled to the first advantageous state (15R probability variable big hit etc.) and high when controlled to the second advantageous state (5R normal big hit etc.). Do not control to stochastic state (do not control to probability variation state),
Further provided is a fake means (production control microcomputer 100) for executing a fake production (eg, a fake production by a 15R fake probable big hit) that is controlled in the second advantageous state despite being in the first advantageous state. ,
The notification effect means may execute the notification effect (execution of the notification effect during a 15R appearance probability variation big hit, etc., S4952 in FIG. 22, etc.) when the appearance effect is executed.

  According to such a structure, the interest of the game in an advantageous state can be improved with the production | presentation according to the kind of advantageous state.

(7) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (6),
When the first advantageous state (15R probability variation big hit etc.) is controlled and when the second advantageous state (5R normal big hit etc.) is controlled, the production mode in the advantageous state is different (15R probability variation big hit and so on). For example, the effect during the big hit game may be different from that of the 5R normal big hit).

  According to such a structure, the interest of the game in an advantageous state can be improved with the production | presentation according to the kind of advantageous state.

(8) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Production state control means (production control microcomputer) capable of controlling the production state in the advantageous state (the production state during the round, etc.) to any one of a plurality of types of production states (A mode or B mode in FIG. 12). 100 etc.)
Notification effect means for executing a notification effect (notification effect by the first notification image 213 and the second notification image 214 shown in FIG. 12) related to the number of game media (number of game balls, etc.) given during the advantageous state ( Production control microcomputer 100),
The notification production means is
When the effect state control means is controlling to the first effect state (A mode or the like), the notification effect in the first notification mode (the first notification image 213 or the like shown in FIG. 12) is executed,
When the effect state control means is controlling the second effect state (B mode or the like) different from the first effect state, a second notification mode (second notification shown in FIG. 12) different from the first notification mode. The notification effect by the image 214 or the like is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the entertainment of the game in the advantageous state can be improved by the notification effect according to the effect state.

(9) In the gaming machine of (8),
The notification effect means that the number of game media granted during the advantageous state has reached a predetermined number (as shown in S941 in FIG. 15, the total number of game balls acquired exceeds n times 500, etc.) The notification effect according to the first notification mode (the first notification image 213 shown in FIG. 12 and the like) may be executed based on the above.

  According to such a configuration, the entertainment of the game in the advantageous state can be improved by diversifying the notification effects.

(10) In the gaming machine of (9),
The notification effecting means determines that the number of game media given during the advantageous state has become a specific number different from the predetermined number (as shown in S943 of FIG. 15, the total number of acquired game balls is n times 2500). The notification effect according to the second notification mode (second notification image 214 shown in FIG. 12, etc.) may be executed.

  According to such a configuration, the entertainment of the game in the advantageous state can be improved by diversifying the notification effects.

(11) In any one of the gaming machines (8) to (10),
Advantageous state control means (such as a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling to the advantageous state (big hit gaming state etc.) when the display result of variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit display result etc.);
In the above-mentioned advantageous state, it is possible to change between a first state (open state or the like) in which a game medium (game ball or the like) can win and a second state (closed state or the like) in which the game medium is difficult to win or difficult to win (closed state or the like). Means (special variable winning ball apparatus 20 etc.);
Each time a game medium wins the variable means, a game medium number display means capable of variably displaying the number of assigned game media (the production control microcomputer 100, the acquired total number display image 224 in the A mode in FIG. 12, B mode) The acquired total number display image 225, S933 in FIG. 14, and the like may be further provided.

  According to such a configuration, since the number of assigned game media can be variably displayed, the interest of the game in the advantageous state can be improved.

(12) In the gaming machine of (11),
The advantageous state control means includes the variable means (special variable winning ball apparatus) until at least one of a specified period (29 seconds or the like) elapses or a predetermined number (10 or the like) of game media is won. 20 etc.) can be controlled to the advantageous state in which a unit game that can be changed to the first state (open state, etc.) is executed a prescribed number of times (15 times, etc.)
The notification effect means is the number of game media awarded when a special number (11th, 12th, etc.) of game media is won in one unit game (over-winning, etc.). , The notification effect may be executed (execution of a process of adding a prize ball in the over winning prize in the process of S930 to S932 in FIG. 14).

  According to such a configuration, since the notification effect is executed after adding the number of game media given in a single unit game, the number of game media awarded more than the specified number, it is appropriate for the player. It is possible to execute a notification effect.

(13) In the gaming machine of (12),
The advantageous state control means includes, as the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state based on a probability variation big hit) and a second advantageous state (a big hit game based on a normal big hit) having a lower advantage than the first advantageous state. Status etc.)
According to a special mode, based on the fact that a special number (11th, 12th, etc.) of game media that is greater than the specified number is won in one unit game in the first advantageous state (over-winning, etc.) The notification effect (notification effect or the like in which the first big prize opening LED 20c emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27 as shown in the second embodiment) can be executed (the effect shown in FIG. 17). The processing of S3923 and S3924 in the control microcomputer 100 can be executed).

  According to such a configuration, by executing the notification effect in the special mode based on the fact that the game medium has won a special number larger than the specified number in one unit game in the first advantageous state, Interest can be improved.

(14) In the gaming machine of any one of (11) to (13),
In the advantageous state, effect state selection means (mode selection image 210 in FIG. 12) for selecting whether the first effect state (A mode or the like) or the second effect state (B mode or the like) is selected. The processing of S925 in FIG. 14 and the like may be further provided.

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to select a production state, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state.

(15) In the gaming machine of any one of (11) to (14),
Notification mode determining means for determining the notification effect mode as one of a plurality of types of notification modes (notification in white characters, notification in rainbow characters, etc. shown in the modification) (production control microcomputer 100, etc.) )
The notification mode determination means determines (deforms) the notification mode based on storing stored storage information in which the display result of variable display becomes a specific display result (such as a big hit display result) during the advantageous state. As shown in the example, based on the fact that there is a reserved memory that becomes a jackpot display result in the reserved memory buffer during the big hit, the notification effect may be changed to a rainbow character, for example).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine the notification mode of the notification effect based on the fact that the hold storage information that is the specific display result is stored in the hold storage, and improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state be able to.

(16) In the gaming machine of any one of (12) to (15),
Special state control means that can be controlled to a special state (probability change state, etc.) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a specific region (a specific region in the second big prize opening, etc.) provided in the variable means in the advantageous state. (Game control microcomputer 560, etc.)
After the game medium passes through the specific area in the advantageous state, the game medium has won a special number (11th, 12th, etc.) more than the specified number in one unit game in the advantageous state (over prize) The notification effect in a special mode (as shown in the second embodiment), such that the first grand prize opening LED 20c emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27 based on (Notification effect etc.) can be executed (the processing of S3923, S3924 in the effect control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 17 can be executed).

  According to such a configuration, after the game medium passes through the specific area, the notification effect in the special mode is executed based on the fact that the game medium has won a special number larger than the prescribed number in one unit game in the advantageous state. By this, the interest of the game by notification production can be improved.

(17) In the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (15),
The specific mode may be more advantageous to the player than the second mode (for example, “character” has a higher reliability for big hits than “blue” or “red”).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation for the hold display in the specific mode.

(18) In the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (17),
The changing means can change the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold storage information stored in a predetermined number (for example, the sixth and seventh) approximate to a specific number at a high rate ( For example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, in the effect mode A, change timing patterns (T06, T07, T60 to T76) including “sixth” and “seventh” as change timings are changed to other change timing patterns. By determining at a higher rate than (T00 to T05, T10 to T54), the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the sixth or seventh can be changed to the second mode at a high rate. 64 (A) and 65. Note that if the gaming machine uses the first mode as the display mode after the change, the change timing of the hold display that has started display in another display mode. By selecting a change timing pattern including “sixth” and “seventh” at a low rate, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored at the 6th or 7th is high. The first mode may be changeable).

  According to such a configuration, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be directed.

(19) In the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (18),
Provide suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part for executing step S8002D in the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the suggestion effect that suggests that the storage information that can be changed to the specific mode is stored. May be.

  According to such a configuration, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

(20) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (19),
The change unit can change the display mode of the hold display to the specific mode only when a specific number of hold storage information is stored in the hold storage unit (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 can perform step S3701). Step S3707 may be executed only when Y is

  According to such a configuration, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

(21) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (20),
A special effect execution capable of executing a special effect (for example, an effect of displaying a special background) in response to a change in the display mode of the hold display to the specific mode, with a specific number of the hold storage information stored in the hold storage unit Means (for example, in the production control microcomputer 100, when Y is step S3701 and step S3707 is executed), a step S3709 may be provided.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect.

(22) In the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (21),
The change means can change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first mode to the second mode (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 uses PT2A, 2B, 4A, 4B, 5A as the change pattern. , 5B is selected, the display mode of the hold display can be changed from “white” to “blue” or “red” by executing step S635). Good.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect.

(23) In the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (22),
First display device (for example, sub display device 9S (sub display device)) and second display device (for example, display device 9 (main display device)) and specific display using the first effect device (for example, hold) Specific display means capable of displaying (display, active display) (for example, the summed hold storage display unit 18c provided in the sub display device 9S, the active display area 9A), and a change effect that can change the display mode of the specific display (for example, , A change effect execution means capable of executing a hold change notice effect (for example, a part in the effect control microcomputer 100 that executes the hold change notice effect when triggered by a predetermined timing during the change of the effect symbol) And
The change effect execution means is a first change effect that can change the display mode of the specific display using the first effect device (for example, the first hold change notice effect (the hold change notice effect 1 with the action effect A, the hold change notice). The second change effect (for example, the second hold change notice effect, for example) that can change the display mode of the specific display by the mode in which the effect 3, the hold change notice effect 5)) and the first effect device and the second effect device are linked. (Holding change notice effect 2 with action effect B, hold change notice effect 4 and hold change notice effect 6)) can be executed, and either the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the specific display is performed. The degree of expectation varies depending on whether the display mode has changed (for example, as shown in FIG. 78, when the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes, the first hold change notice is displayed. The production is executed and the hold display is displayed As compared with the case where recommendation has changed, expectations for big hit high (reliability) of) it is also possible.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of changing effects by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of changing effects.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table used in order to determine a fluctuation pattern in a table format. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating alerting | reporting effect. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows the round post-process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round post-process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round post-process of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the alerting | reporting effect of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the alerting | reporting effect of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process in round of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process in round of 3rd Embodiment. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine in 4th Embodiment from the front. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a distribution apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding specific area | region and a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding display control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern determination table for 1st hits used when production mode is A and the determination result at the time of winning is a big hit or a small win. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern determination table for 2nd hits used when there exists production mode B and the determination result at the time of winning is a big hit or a small win. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern determination table for a loss used when the determination result at the time of winning is a loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st change timing determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd change timing determination table A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd change timing determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a character change process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows a suggestion effect execution lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an effect mode transfer lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of an effect display apparatus in case a character change generate | occur | produces. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine 1 in 5th Embodiment from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending | holding change notice effect determination table in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in 5th Embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine or a slot machine. Any game machine may be used as long as it is a machine.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is a hit type table.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area 7. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray (lower plate) 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball, and the like. ing. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been thrown can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray 4 (lower plate) is configured in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position (for example, a central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body, for example, A stick controller 122 that can be held and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right) is attached. It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operation by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) that can perform an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 121 (see FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like with respect to the trigger button 125 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. Built-in). In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower pan body inside the stick controller 122 and the like. Further, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) 3 may be operated by a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by depressing a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 only needs to be configured to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) that detects the player's operation action performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the upper plate body at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper and lower plates. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 as the position approached to either right or left in the upper plate and the lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the attachment position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not in the vertical positional relationship, but may be in the horizontal positional relationship, for example. As operation means, other operation means such as a lever switch and a jog dial may be provided.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, there is provided an effect display device 9 as display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as a decorative display) effect symbols (also referred to as decorative symbols) as a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified. It has been. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8 a that variably displays a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, A second special symbol display (second variable display section) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them is provided.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is configured by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbols synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is provided on the display screen. It is done. In the effect symbol display area, for example, a symbol display area for variably displaying three decorative symbols (effect) for left, middle, and right is formed.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  In addition, although the case where the two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided is shown above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by a game control microcomputer 560 (see FIG. 3) mounted on the main board (game control board) 31 (see FIG. 3). Is done. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100 (see FIG. 3) mounted on the effect control board 80 (see FIG. 3). When variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8b displays the first special symbol. 2 When the special symbol variable display is being executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  More specifically, in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is in the first start winning opening ( After passing the first start port) 13 or the second start winning port (second starting port) 14 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of stored storage is not 0) The first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed, and are started based on the fact that the big hit game is not executed), and the variation time (variable display time, When the variable display time) elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  When the jackpot display result (big jackpot symbol) as the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, or the jackpot display result (jackpot symbol) as the specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. When the derived display is performed, the effect display device 9 also derives and displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbol) as the specific display result. Thus, when the specific display result is displayed as the display result of variable display (also referred to as variable display result or variable display result), the specific gaming state as an advantageous state to which a value (advantageous value) advantageous to the player is given It is controlled to (big hit gaming state).

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) In the state where it is in agreement with the combination of symbols), it is stopped, swinging, enlarged or reduced or deformed, or multiple symbols can be variably displayed synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the symbols can be switched An effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit is continued before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the variable display of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed is continued. This is a display state or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are variably displayed synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, reach refers to a state in which identification information forms a specific display result in a plurality of symbol display areas, but is variably displayed in at least some symbol display areas. In the present embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design etc.)) or a display mode (for example, color etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 9 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is likely to occur compared to a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

  A winning ball apparatus having a first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 (second starting port) through which a game ball can win is provided below the winning ball device having the first starting winning port 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Accordingly, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize. Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a ball striking device for driving a driving motor in response to the player operating the ball striking operation handle 5, and using the rotational force of the driving motor to launch the game ball to the game area 7 (see FIG. Not shown). A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts variable display of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 9 is a decorative (for effect) symbol during the variation time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and during the variation time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. The effect design (decoration design) is variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, a hold storage display unit (total hold storage display unit) that displays the total number of the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number (total hold memory number). , A hold display area, not shown). In the total hold memory display unit, the hold memory number as the hold memory display, for example, the hold memory image that can be specified by the display number of the predetermined image (by displaying the hold memory image one by one corresponding to each of the hold memory information, Is specified). As described above, by providing the summation pending storage display unit that displays the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition. In each of the first special symbol hold memory display 18a, the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, and the effect display device 9, the light emission display and the image display for indicating the number of hold memories are a hold display or a hold. Called memory display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state where the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened is called a round. Thus, the repeated continuation control is also called round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, and when it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, one of the jackpot types is selected.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, there is provided a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols that can be distinguished from each other. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Moreover, the small display is formed in, for example, a square shape.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in a disadvantageous state for a player for a predetermined number of times. To an open state advantageous to the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  Further, an accessory 12 is provided above the effect display device 9. The accessory 12 is located between the game board 6 and the effect display device 9 and can be displaced by the accessory motor 17. The accessory 12 is usually located in a place where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, and moves to a position that is visible to the player when the predetermined effect is executed (for example, a position in front of the effect display device 9).

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter also simply referred to as “card unit”) that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  In the hit type table of FIG. 2, for each hit type in the big hit, the big hit probability after the end of the big hit gaming state, the base after the end of the big hit gaming state, the variation time after the end of the big hit gaming state, the number of releases in the big hit ( The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

  Specifically, in the big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or The closed state is established when a predetermined number (for example, ten) of winning balls is generated. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of releases in the big hit gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  Here, in the big hit of this embodiment, the total number of game balls that can be acquired in one big hit is about 1500. Specifically, in one round, there are 10 payouts for 1 winning game ball, and the round continues until 10 wins, so about 100 per round (10 × 10 = 100) game balls can be obtained. Furthermore, since the round continues up to 15 rounds, a total of about 1500 game balls can be obtained. In addition, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in an open state, the game ball is accidentally set immediately before the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is closed before a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses. There may be a special number (for example, 11th or 12th) that is greater than the number (for example, 10). Such a winning that exceeds a predetermined standard is also referred to as an over winning. When an over winning is generated, the player can acquire more balls.

  Among the “big hits”, after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the probability change state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit is higher than the normal state (the normal gaming state that is not the probability change state) as the special gaming state. The type (type) of jackpot that shifts to (an abbreviation for probability variation state, also referred to as high probability state) is called “probability jackpot”. In the present embodiment, the special gaming state may be controlled to a short time state in which the variation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened from the non-short time state in association with the probability changing state. Note that the special gaming state may be controlled to the short time state independently of the probability variation state.

  In this way, the transition time to the short-time state reduces the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol. Therefore, when the short-time state is reached, it is easy for an effective start winning to occur, and a big hit game may be performed. Rise. Of the “hit”, a type of jackpot (type) that is controlled to the big hit gaming state and does not shift to the probable change state is called “ordinary big hit”.

  Further, as the special game state, the frequency of the game ball entering the variable prize ball device 15 is increased by increasing the frequency that the variable prize ball device 15 is opened in association with the probability change state or the short time state. There are cases where the control is performed in an electric chew support control state that facilitates winning (higher approaching and higher frequency) in the variable winning ball apparatus 15. Since the electric chew support control state is a high base state as will be described later, in the following description, it is mainly referred to as a high base state.

  Here, electric Chu support control will be described. As electric Chu support control, normal symbol variation time (time from variable symbol display start time to display result derivation display time) is shortened and the display result is derived and displayed early (normal symbol shortening control) Control that increases the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol (normal symbol probability control), control that increases the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time extension control), and opening of the variable winning ball device 15 Control for increasing the number of times (opening number increase control) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball device 15 is open is higher than when the control is not performed. As a result, the game ball is likely to start and win (the variable display execution condition in the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established). By this control, the winning frequency to the second starting winning port 14 is increased, so that a gaming state in which the frequency of establishment of the second starting condition and / or the frequency of execution of variable display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state (high frequency state) in which the winning frequency at the second start winning opening 14 is increased by the electric Chu support control is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as a winning ball according to the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. Since the “base” is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called a “high base state”. Further, when such control is not performed, it is called a “low base state”. Such control is control for facilitating winning in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 by supporting the winning with the variable winning ball apparatus 15, that is, the electric tulip, and is referred to as “electric chew support control”.

  In the present embodiment, as terms indicating the state of jackpot probability, "high probability state (probability variation state)" and "low probability state (non-probability variation state)", as a term indicating the combination of the base state, The “high base state (electric Chu support control state)” and “low base state (non-electric Chu support control state)” are used.

  In the present embodiment, “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy high base state”, and “high accuracy high base state” are used as terms indicating the combination of the state of the big hit probability and the base state. . The “low probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “low probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the high base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the high base state.

  As shown in FIG. 2, as the big hit of 15 rounds, a plurality of types of big hits, a normal big hit and a probable big hit, are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to the non-probability changing state, the short time state, and the high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state. Normally, in the big hit, the condition that the short-time state and the high base state are executed until the predetermined number of times that the variable display is executed 100 times, or the condition that the next big hit occurs, whichever comes first is established. It continues for a period until. Note that the non-probability change state continues for a period from when a probability change jackpot occurs later to when the game proceeds to the probability change state after the end of the 15-round jackpot game state. Further, the normal big hit may be controlled so as to be a big hit controlled in a non-probability changing state, a non-time-short state, and a non-electricity chew support control state (low probability low base state).

  The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to the probability variation state, the time-short state, and the high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds of the jackpot gaming state. In the probability change big hit, the condition that the probability change state, the short time state, and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times of variable display or the condition that the next big hit occurs, whichever is earlier Continue for the period until the condition is met. Note that the end condition such as the probability variation state may be a condition that the next big hit occurs.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. FIG. 3 also shows the payout control board 37 and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which a ROM 54 and a RAM 55 are built. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data in accordance with the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates the random data at random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that provides detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Also, an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control microcomputer 100, a ROM 102, a RAM 103, a VDP 109, an I / O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores a program and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be built in the production control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 controls display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 provides an effect control command for instructing effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77 that allows signals to pass only in one direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. And display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side through the lamp driver board 35 and the speaker 27 through the audio output board 70. Various effects are controlled, such as controlling the sound output.

  Further, the production control CPU 101 sends an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action to the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 is detected from the trigger sensor 121 to the input port of the I / O port unit 105. Enter through. Further, the production control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port of the I / O port unit 105. To do. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 as an input to the I / O port unit 105. Enter through the port. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate. The effect control CPU 101 drives the accessory 12 by driving the accessory motor 17 via a motor drive circuit (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 4 shows the type of random number, the update range, the usage, and the addition condition. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for hit determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated one by one at 10 MHz, is added and updated from 0, and is added and updated to its upper limit of 65535, and then is added and updated again from 0.
(2) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (any type of type, normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination).
(3) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination).
(4) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination).
(5) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).
(6) Random 5 (MR5): An initial value of random 4 is determined (for determining a random 4 initial value).

  In the present embodiment, the big hit that is the specific gaming state includes a plurality of types, that is, a normal big hit and a probable big hit. Therefore, when the big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), the big hit type is determined based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). Determined by type. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a jackpot symbol determining random number.

  In addition, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and is included in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). To determine the variation pattern. As described above, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type. The variation pattern type may be called a variation type or a variation category.

  In the present embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type without reach and a reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type with reach.

  When the display result is out of order, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different depending on whether it is in the short-time state or not in the short-time state. When this is the case, the variation time is shortened compared to when the time is not short. For example, in the short-time state, in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time compared to when the time-short state is not, the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than when the time is not short, or the fluctuation pattern type is the most variable The variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected more frequently, and even when the reach type is selected, the normal reach variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time is shorter than when not in the time-short state.

  In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be variably displayed is a predetermined number or more and when it is less than the predetermined number, When the number of reserved memories of each special symbol that is variably displayed is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the number-of-holds shortening control is executed to reduce the variation time compared to when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol is less than the predetermined number. You may do it. For example, in the hold number shortening control state, it is set so that the rate at which the variation pattern type with a short variation time such as the normal variation pattern type is selected is higher than in the non-holding number shortening control state. You may make it the average time of a fluctuation | variation time become short compared with the time of not being a holding number shortening control state. Further, in the hold number reduction control, the change time itself of the change pattern type may be shortened even when the same change pattern type is selected as compared with the case where the hold number reduction control state is not set.

  The variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of the two-step determination method of determining the variation pattern after determining the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability change) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state), and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state.

  Each value described in the left column of FIG. 5 (A) is set as a big hit determination value in the normal jackpot determination table, and is described in the right column of FIG. 5 (A) in the probability change big hit determination table. Each value is set as a big hit judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (referred to as the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). Due to the addition of the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number (10 times the number of jackpot judgment values) than the probability change jackpot judgment table (referred to as the jackpot judgment value or the second jackpot judgment value at the time of probability change) is set. . As a result, the probability variation state is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown, it is decided to make a big jackpot (normal jackpot or probable big hit) for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 5A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

  FIGS. 5B and 5C are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 5 (B) shows a case where a jackpot type is determined using a holding memory (also referred to as a first holding memory) based on a game ball winning in the first start winning opening 13 (a variable display of the first special symbol is displayed). 1 is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used when FIG. 5 (C) shows a case where a jackpot type is determined using a holding memory (also referred to as a second holding memory) based on a game ball winning in the second start winning opening 14 (a variable display of the second special symbol is displayed). It is a 2nd special symbol jackpot type determination table used when it is performed.

  Each of the first and second special symbol jackpot type determination tables of FIG. 5 (B) and FIG. 5 (C) is a jackpot type when it is determined that the display result of variable display is a jackpot symbol. Based on the random number for determination (random 1), the type of jackpot is determined to be either “normal jackpot” or “probability variation jackpot”, and is also referred to to determine the jackpot symbol.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5B is a numerical value to be compared with a random 1 value, and is a determination value corresponding to each of “normal jackpot” and “probability variable jackpot” (jackpot type determination) Value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C), there are numerical values to be compared with random 1 values, which are judgment values corresponding to “normal jackpot” and “probable variation jackpot” (jackpot type judgment). Value) is set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5B and 5C, the big hit type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “normal jackpot” is also set as a determination value corresponding to “3” of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “probable big hit” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “7” of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 56 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value having the same random 1 value as the jackpot type, and also determines the jackpot symbol having the same random 1 value as the jackpot symbol. To do. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5B and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5C have the same ratio determined for probability variation jackpots. In such a case, the big hit type determination table may not be divided between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, when the big hit type is selected from a plurality of types of big hits having different maximum round numbers in the big hit gaming state as the big hit type, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. You may set so that the ratio by which the big hit type with many round numbers is selected becomes higher than the 1st special symbol big hit type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, the big hit type selection is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the ratio of the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5C may be higher than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5B. . By doing so, the variable display of the second special symbol can be made more likely to be a big hit than the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table may be set to have a higher ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table.

  Next, a variation pattern table used for selecting and determining the variation pattern of the special symbol and the effect symbol in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern in a table format.

  In FIG. 6, (a) shows a determination table for when the normal state is shifted, and (b) shows a determination table for when the time-short state is shifted. Further, (c) shows a normal big hit determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation big hit determination table. Each determination table of FIGS. 6A to 6D is stored in the ROM 54, is selected according to the gaming state, and is used to determine (determine) the variation pattern type and variation pattern.

  The determination table shown in FIG. 6 includes a variation pattern type determination table that indicates the relationship between random 2 and the variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination table that indicates the relationship between random 3 and each variation pattern for each variation pattern type. Including.

  In the column of “variation pattern type” or “variation pattern” in each table of FIG. 6, “normal” or “normal variation” indicates a normal variation pattern that does not reach.

  Further, “normal reach” in each table of FIG. 6 indicates a fluctuation pattern of normal reach that does not perform a particularly flashy effect when the reach state is reached. “Super Reach” indicates a variation pattern for performing a reach effect in which a special effect image is displayed when the reach state is reached.

  Further, as described above, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the ratio selected when a big hit is higher than that of “normal reach” is high, and the reliability of the big hit is high. Furthermore, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is longer than that of “normal reach” (for example, normal reach 10 seconds, super reach 50 seconds to 80 seconds). In addition, four types of fluctuation patterns are set for the super reach, and the big hit expectation degree (the big win becomes the first super reach <the second super reach <the third super reach <the fourth super reach). (Possibility) is high.

  The “expectation” is a concept including an expectation for jackpot, an expectation for probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation (also referred to as reliability) for the big hit is the degree of expectation (ratio that becomes a big hit) when each reach fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, the reach fluctuation is performed 100 times. If the number of hits is 60 times, the degree of expectation for the big hit is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears is 60%). In addition, the degree of expectation for probability variation refers to the degree of expectation (proportion of probability variation) that shifts to the probability variation state.

  It should be noted that the variation pattern shown in the loss determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of variable display is a display result of “out”. The variation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variable display becomes the display result of “normal jackpot”. The variation pattern shown in the probability variation big hit determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variable display becomes the display result of “probable variation big hit”.

  Based on such information, for example, the variation pattern “fourth super reach (80 seconds)” shown in the “variation pattern” column of FIG. It is shown that the variation pattern of the fourth super reach executed in seconds.

  The column labeled “Random 2 Range” and “Variation Pattern Type” in the table of FIG. 6 has a function as a variation pattern type determination table section indicating the relationship between “Random 2 Range” and “Variation Pattern Type”. It is a column to show. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, there are a plurality of random 2 (1-251) values for each of a plurality of variation pattern types such as “normal”, “normal reach”, and “super reach”. It is divided into numerical ranges. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, if the random 2 value extracted at a predetermined timing matches one of the determination values assigned to 140 to 229 among the random values 1 to 251. Then, it is determined that the variation pattern type is “normal reach”.

  In the table of FIG. 6, “Random 3 range” and “Fluctuation pattern” are described as functions of a variation pattern determination table that indicates the relationship between “Random 3 range” and “Variation pattern”. It is a column. The variation patterns shown corresponding to each type of variation pattern type determination table are variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, the variation patterns belonging to the type of “super reach” are “first super reach”, “second super reach”, “third super reach”, and “first super reach”. “4 Super Reach”.

  All values of random 3 (1-220) are assigned to a plurality of numerical ranges in each of a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each variation pattern type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of “super reach” is selected, random 3 extracted at a predetermined timing is 1 to 220 of random values of 1 to 220. If it matches any numerical value of the determination values assigned to ˜70, it is determined that the variation pattern of “first super reach (50 seconds)” is set.

  When the display result (variable display result) of the variable display for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out of sync, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. When the variable display result is out of time in the non-time-short state, the normal state out-of-state determination table in FIG. 6A is selected. On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of time in the time reduction state, the time reduction state determination table in FIG. 6B is selected. It should be noted that by using the determination tables of FIGS. 6A and 6B, the reach ratio at the time of deviation from the normal state and from the short-time state is constant regardless of the number of holds.

  When the variable display result is a big hit for the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether the time is short or not, the determination table is selected as follows to determine the variation pattern. When the variable display result is a normal big hit, the normal big hit determination table of FIG. 6C is selected. When the variable display result is a probable big hit regardless of whether the time is short or not, the probable big hit determination table of FIG. 6D is selected.

  In the time short state deviation determination table in FIG. 6B, the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is set shorter than that in the normal state deviation time determination table in FIG. 6B is shorter than the reach fluctuation (including normal reach fluctuation and super reach fluctuation) compared to the normal state deviation determination table of FIG. 6A. So that the percentage determined for normal fluctuations (non-reach deviation fluctuations (variations resulting in deviation display results instead of reaching reach)) is low, and the percentage determined for reach fluctuations with longer fluctuation times than normal fluctuations is low. Data is set.

  As a result, compared to the non-time-short state (normal state), the rate of change in the short-time state is higher in the time-short state, so the time-short state is the non-time-short state. The fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is shorter than in the case of. That is, by selecting the determination table as described above, the time-saving state can be realized, and the time for pending digestion can be shortened (reduction in the number of pending storages, that is, promotion of pending digestion can be promoted).

  In the determination tables shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B that are selected when there is a deviation, the data is set so that the selection type of the reach type is selected in a height relationship such that normal reach> super reach. Has been. On the other hand, in the determination tables of FIG. 6C and FIG. 6D that are selected when a big hit is made, the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high / low relationship such that normal reach <super reach. Data is set. As a result, the ratio of super reach reach production (the ratio of super reach reach production when a reach is selected) is higher when a big hit is made than when it is out of reach. The performance can increase the player's expectation.

  In addition, the determination table shown in FIG. 6D that is selected when a promising big hit out of the big hits has a normal reach compared to the determination table shown in FIG. On the other hand, the data is set so that the ratio of selecting the type of super reach production is high. As a result, when the probability is a big hit, the ratio of the reach reach of the super reach (the ratio of the reach reach of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than the case of the normal big win. By performing the reach of reach, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a promising big hit.

  Such a variation pattern is obtained when the total number of reserved storage (total value) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are variably displayed is a predetermined number or more (for example, the total number of reserved storage is 3 or more). By setting the selection ratio to be different from when the number is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of pending storage is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the variation time is longer than when the total number of pending storage is less than the predetermined number It is also possible to execute the hold number shortening control for shortening. However, even when the hold number reduction control is executed (for example, the combined hold storage number is 3 or more), the expectation for reach can be maintained by keeping the ratio of reach (including normal reach and super reach) constant. In addition, only the super reach in the reach may not be shortened so as to execute the hold time reduction control. Furthermore, the short time control of the number of holdings may be executable by selecting a high rate of normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time, or may be executable by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself, The combination may be used.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 7, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits various effect control commands to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the game control state.

  Main commands in FIG. 7 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used as shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result designation commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit.

  Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that variable display of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that variable display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (design determination designation command) for designating to end the variation of the first and second special symbols.

  The commands A001 to A002 (H) are jackpot start designation commands that designate the jackpot gaming state start for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  The command A1XX (H) is a special winning opening open designation command that indicates a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designation command after opening the big prize opening indicating the opening (closing) of the big prize opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating the jackpot gaming state end for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  Command A 401 (H) is a first start winning designation command for designating that the first starting win has been received. Command A 402 (H) is a second start winning designation command for designating that there has been a second start winning.

  Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state). Command B001 (H) is a short time state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the short time state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a probability variation state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state).

  Command C0XX (H) is a combined pending storage number designation command indicating the combined pending storage number. The command C100 (H) is a total pending storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total pending storage number is decremented by one. In the present embodiment, the combined reserved memory number designation command is used when a game ball is won at the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (for example, when a start opening switch passing process described later is executed). It is sent to the production control microcomputer 100. Further, the total pending storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 at the start of variable display. Note that the combined pending storage designation command and the pending storage count subtraction designation command may be used together. For example, the total reserved memory number designation command may be used as a command that can specify the reserved memory number after subtraction. In addition, the command which can specify the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is transmitted instead of the combined reserved memory number, and the production control microcomputer 100 transmits the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. May be specified as the total pending storage number.

  The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are the results of winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. This is an effect control command indicating the contents. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the winning determination result is a big hit and the determination result of the type of big hit. The command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the random value for variation pattern type determination among the winning determination results. It is.

  In the present embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to win a big win at the start winning, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type and the variation pattern type determination random number. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit and a value for designating the type of the big win are set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. A value for designating a range of a judgment value as a judgment result of the fluctuation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In the present embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big win and the type of the big win based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big win can be changed. Based on the type command, the variation pattern type can be recognized.

  The command D0XX is a big winning opening prize notification command for notifying that a game ball has won a big winning opening. The big prize opening notification command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 when, for example, a game ball passes through the big prize opening.

  Next, a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing data (holding storage data) such as random numbers corresponding to the holding storage on the game control microcomputer 560 side will be described. The reserved storage buffer is provided in the RAM 55.

  In the first reserved memory buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved memory number is secured. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a jackpot determination random number (random R) that is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number. (Random 2) and random number for variation pattern determination (Random 3) are stored.

  Based on the winning at the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14, the CPU 56 extracts such random number values from the random number circuit 503 and a random counter for generating a software random number, A process of saving (storing) in the saving area in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer is executed. Specifically, on the basis of winning at the first start winning opening 13, these random number values are extracted and stored in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, based on the winning at the second start winning opening 14, these random number values are extracted and stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

  In some cases, “holding stored” indicates that the information related to the start winning as described above is stored in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer. Note that the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) and the random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the storage area in advance. It may be extracted at the time of the start of symbol variation.

  As described later, the data stored in the hold storage buffer is read at the time of starting winning and used for pre-reading notice effect, and is read at the start of variable display and used for variable display.

  When there is a start prize at the first start prize port 13 or the second start prize slot 14, it is called a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a first (second) start prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command. A command indicating the determination result of the start winning determination process is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In the start winning reception command buffer provided in the RAM 103 of the effect control microcomputer 100, the received symbol designation command, variation type command, first (second) start prize designation command, and total pending storage number designation command are received. A storage area for storing data that can identify received commands is secured so that various commands such as can be stored in association with each other.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, and the variable display operation of the effect symbol, the reach effect And the like, or data indicating the control contents of various effect operations such as various effect operations not accompanied by variable display of effect symbols. The notice effect control pattern includes data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. As a result, various game controls can be executed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, normal time initialization processing, game state restoration processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of the random number circuit 503), display random number update processing (variation pattern) (Variable random number update processing such as type determination and variation pattern determination), initial value random number update processing (ordinary symbol determination random number generation counter initial value initial value update processing), and the like.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S (hereinafter simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been turned on) is executed (S20). Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: S21). .

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol determination random number and a big hit type determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S23). . The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, the corresponding special symbol process 8 is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The value of the flag is updated according to the gaming state.

  Next, the normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state. Update accordingly.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (S30).

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. Is output to the output port (S31: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends. With the above control, in the present embodiment, the game control process is started every predetermined time.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, a start port switch passing process is executed (S312). Then, any one of S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, as described above, the RAM 55 stores reserved storage data (first reserved storage data) such as a big hit determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. A first reserved storage buffer to be stored, and a second reserved storage buffer in which reserved storage data (second reserved storage data) such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is stored Is provided. In each of these reserved storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the number of each reserved storage is secured.

  In the start port switch passing process, if the first start port switch 13a is turned on, the number of first reserved stored data is stored on the condition that the first reserved stored number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). 1 is incremented, and the numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination) are obtained from the random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. (Random number for use) is extracted, and processing for storing (storing) them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “first” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after the summation is executed. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 14a is on, the second number of stored second stored data is counted on condition that the second number of stored storage has not reached the upper limit (for example, 4). Increase the value of the pending storage number counter by 1, and extract numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number) from the random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number Then, a process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “second” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after the summation is executed.

  The processing of S300 to S307 is as follows. The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of variable display is a big hit, and determining a big hit type in the case of a big hit. In the variation pattern setting process (S301), the variation pattern is determined (the variation pattern type determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number are determined), and the variation time is measured according to the determined variation pattern. This is a process for performing control such as the start of timing of the fluctuation time timer.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for performing control to transmit a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The special symbol changing process (S303) is a process that advances the process to the special symbol stop process when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S304) performs variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is timed by the variation time timer. This is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The big winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) is a process of performing control for opening the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 according to the type of the big hit. In the special winning opening opening process (S306), the control for transmitting the production control command for the round display production in the big hit gaming state to the production control microcomputer 100 and the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening are confirmed. This is processing for performing processing and the like. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (S305). When all the rounds are finished, the process shifts to a big hit end process (S307). The big hit end process (S307) is a process for performing control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended.

  Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80.

  The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main process when the power is turned on. In the effect control main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initial setting of a timer for determining an activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms), and the like (S701). ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the effect control main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command indicates. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can identify a received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 103) is performed (command analysis processing: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process, in order to perform various effects such as variable display of effect symbols on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704, the current control among the processes according to the control state. A process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) is selected and the effect control is executed.

  Next, random numbers (SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol used by the microcomputer 100 for effect control) Etc.) is executed (S707). Each of such random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 is generated by counting of a random counter that updates a count value by software, and is cyclically updated within a predetermined range for each. By being extracted at a predetermined timing, it is used as a random number.

  Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving or deleting the hold display, etc.) is executed (S708).

  By executing such effect control main processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits the effect display device 9, various lamps, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 and received. By controlling the production device such as the speaker 27, various production controls according to the gaming state are performed.

  Here, the RAM 103 mounted on the effect control board 80 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

  In the effect control flag setting unit, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the effect display device 9, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 31, etc. A flag is provided. For example, the production control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the effect display device 9. For example, the production control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, in the effect control counter setting unit, data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters is stored.

  The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 executes the pre-read effect process (S500) for determining whether to perform the pre-read effect and selecting the type of the pre-read effect, and then the value of the effect control process flag. Depending on, any one of S800 to S807 is performed.

  In the effect control process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, the control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second special symbol. The control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change in the effect is also executed in one effect control process.

  The pre-reading effect process (S500) is a process for performing pre-reading determination such as whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determining an effect mode when the pre-reading effect is executed. The pre-reading effect is to determine the content of the variable display based on the hold information by pre-reading the hold information before the order of the variable display (symbol fluctuation) based on the hold information (holding storage information) comes. This is a production technique such as giving notice in advance of how variable display will be in the future. For example, when the display result of variable display based on certain hold information is a big hit, before the variable display by the hold information is executed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information, the display mode of the background image, etc. When the display mode in the variable display based on certain hold information is super reach, the variable display based on the hold information is displayed. A pre-reading effect such as a notice that there is a possibility of becoming super-reach later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information, the display mode of the background image, etc. before being executed. Done. Hereinafter, the variable display based on the hold information as the target of the pre-reading effect is referred to as “target variable display”.

  The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) is a process of performing a process of confirming whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process proceeds to the effect symbol variation start process.

  The effect symbol variation start process (S801) is a process for controlling so that variable display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) is started. The effect symbol variation process (S802) is a process for performing processing for controlling the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern. The effect symbol variation stop process (S803) is a process of performing control to stop variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) and derive and display the variable display result (final stop symbol).

  The jackpot display process (S804) is a process for performing display control such as control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the jackpot after the end of the variation time. The round process (S805) is a process for performing display control during a round. If the final round is not completed when the round end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to post-round processing. The post-round processing (S806) is processing for performing display control between rounds. If the round start condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to in-round processing. If the final round has ended, the process proceeds to jackpot end processing. The jackpot end effect process (S807) is a process of performing display control for notifying the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended in the effect display device 9.

  The CPU 101 for effect control is a process stored in the ROM 102 during a predetermined effect control period from the start of variable display to the derivation display of the display result and from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end of the big hit gaming state. In accordance with the process data set in the table, an effect device (effect parts) such as the effect display device 9 is controlled.

  The process table includes process timer set values and data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display variation time (variable display time) of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  Next, various effects performed in the present embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the big hit display result, the big hit gaming state advantageous to the player is controlled. Then, during the round in the big hit game state, a notification effect related to the number of game balls given by winning a game ball is executed. Here, the notification effect related to the number of game balls includes an effect of notifying the number of acquired game balls to be paid out to the winning game balls. In addition, the notification effect related to the number of game balls includes an effect of notifying the occurrence of an over winning by changing the notification mode when an over winning is generated. Thus, the effect related to the number of game balls is an effect of performing some kind of notification for the acquired game balls (number of game balls).

  In addition, a plurality of types of notification effects related to the number of game balls are provided. For example, when the effect state is the first effect state, the notification effect is executed in the first notification mode, and when the effect state is the second effect state, the notification effect is executed in the second notification mode. In other words, the notification effect is executed depending on the effect state. The notification effect according to the first notification mode is executed based on the fact that the number of game media provided during the round (during the big hit gaming state) has reached a predetermined number. Further, the notification effect in the second notification mode is executed based on the fact that the number of game media given during the round (during the big hit gaming state) has become a specific number different from the predetermined number.

  During the round (during the big hit gaming state), each time a game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 20, the number of game balls given is displayed so as to be variably displayed. Further, it is possible to select whether the production state during the round (during the big hit gaming state) is the first production state or the second production state. In addition, the number of game balls acquired by winning over is also considered in the count of game balls for notification effects related to the number of game balls.

  A specific example of the notification effect will be described below. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a notification effect. Here, in the present embodiment, the total number of game balls that can be acquired in one big hit is about 1500. Specifically, in one round, there are 10 payouts for 1 winning game ball, and the round continues until 10 wins, so about 100 per round (10 × 10 = 100) game balls can be obtained. When the big hit continues, the previous acquired total number display value is taken over. FIG. 12 shows a case where the second and subsequent jackpots are executed.

  FIG. 12A is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect display device 9 in the first round during the big hit game when the big hit display result is obtained. In the first round, an effect that enables selection of the effect state during the round from two modes is executed. On the left side of the screen of the effect display device 9, an A mode image 211 by a girl character is displayed. Further, a B-mode image 212 by a boy character is displayed on the right side of the screen of the effect display device 9. The player selects one of the modes according to the mode selection image 210 indicated by the left and right arrows prompting the player to perform a selection operation. At the start of the round, the A mode image 211 is selected as the initial value, and the left side of the mode selection image 210 is selected. The fact that these images are selected can be known by blinking the images. The selected image may be surrounded by a thick frame instead of blinking, and any mode may be used as long as it is known that any mode is selected.

  The player can select any mode during one round. Such switching of the mode (effect state) can be changed by operating the stick controller 122 left and right. It should be noted that the left / right selection can be changed by operating means such as a cross key, or the mode can be switched by pressing the push button 120. Further, three or more types of effect modes may be provided, or the types of effect modes that can be selected for each jackpot may be increased. Further, the mode selection period may be a round other than one round, and the selection operation may be performed only for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) during the round. In addition, a new production mode may be set as an initial value (type of mode selected first) for each jackpot.

  FIGS. 12B to 12D are explanatory diagrams showing display screens of the effect display device 9 when the A mode is selected. FIGS. 12E to 12G are explanatory views showing display screens of the effect display device 9 when the B mode is selected. As shown in FIG. 12 (b), when the A mode is selected, an acquired total number display image 224 of the number of game balls acquired by winning the big winning opening is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The acquired total number display image 224 increases every time the game ball wins a big winning opening. FIG. 12B shows that the total number of acquired game balls in the jackpot is 2000. In addition, the first notification image 213 is displayed at the center of the screen every time the number of game balls acquired by winning in the big winning opening exceeds a multiple of 500. In FIG. 12B, when the number of game balls exceeds 2000, which is four times 500, the first notification image 213 indicates that 2000 game balls have been acquired. A girl image 221 is displayed on the upper right of the screen. In addition, the number displayed on the acquired total number display image 224 and the number displayed as the 1st alerting | reporting image 213 have shown the case where it is the same display at an instantaneous timing. In addition, when the acquired total number is not a good number (for example, when it is increased by 13), the number displayed in the acquired total number display image 224 is different from the number displayed as the first notification image 213 ( The number displayed in the acquired total number display image 224 may be 2013, the number displayed as the first notification image 213 may be 2000), and the like.

  FIG.12 (c) has shown the display screen of the effect display apparatus 9 when the acquisition total number of the game ball acquired in the same jackpot as FIG.12 (b) becomes 2500 pieces. As shown in FIG. 12 (c), the acquired total number display image 224 indicates that the total number of acquired game balls is 2500. In addition, when the number of game balls exceeds 2500, which is five times 500, the first notification image 213 indicates that 2500 game balls have been acquired. Further, the girl image 221 is displayed as a person different from that shown in FIG. Further, in the fourth big hit, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is as shown in FIG. FIG. 12D shows that the acquired total number display image 224 is 5000. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 5000, which is 10 times 500, the first notification image 213 indicates that 5000 game balls have been acquired. In addition, the girl image 221 is displayed as a different person from that in FIGS. 12B and 12C. Thus, when the number of game balls exceeds a multiple of 500, the girl image 221 also changes together with the first notification image 213. Here, the first notification image 213 and the girl image 221 are continuously displayed until the next notification image 213 and the girl image 221 are changed. However, the first notification image 213 and the girl image 221 may be deleted when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Next, a case where the B mode is selected in FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 (e), when the B mode is selected, an acquired total number display image 225 of the number of game balls acquired by winning the big winning opening is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The acquired total number display image 225 increases every time a game ball wins a big winning opening. Here, the acquired total number display image 225 in the B mode and the acquired total number display image 224 in the A mode are different in character display mode. As described above, the display of the total number of acquisitions is different depending on the effect mode, but the display of the total number of acquisitions may be the same regardless of the mode. FIG. 12 (e) shows that the total number of acquired game balls in the jackpot is 2000. In addition, a boy image 222 is displayed on the upper right of the screen. In the B mode, such an effect by the boy image 222 is executed. However, unlike the A mode, in the B mode, even if the total number of game balls acquired exceeds 2000, the effect of notifying the total number of game balls acquired in the center of the screen is not executed. In FIG. 12 (e), another effect image may be displayed without displaying the boy image 222.

  FIG. 12 (f) shows a display screen of the effect display device 9 when the total number of game balls acquired in the same big hit as FIG. 12 (e) is 2500. As shown in FIG. 12 (f), the acquired total number display image 225 indicates that the total number of acquired game balls is 2500. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 2500, the second notification image 214 indicates that 2500 game balls have been acquired. In the B mode, the second notification image 214 is displayed at the center of the screen every time the number of game balls acquired by winning a winning opening exceeds a multiple of 2500. In FIG. 12 (f), when the number of game balls exceeds 2500, which is 1 times 2500, the second notification image 214 indicates that 2500 game balls have been acquired. The second notification image 214 is deleted when a predetermined time elapses (for example, after 2 seconds from the display).

  Further, in the fourth big hit, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is as shown in FIG. FIG. 12G shows that the total number display image 225 acquired is 5000. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 5000, which is twice 2500, the second notification image 214 indicates that 5000 game balls have been acquired. Here, in the B mode, the boy image 222 does not change the character as in the A mode, and an image of the same person is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 12, when the mode is controlled to A mode, a notification effect due to the acquisition of a game ball is executed by the first notification image 213. In addition, when the mode is controlled to the B mode, the second notification image 214 performs a notification effect by acquiring a game ball. Therefore, the entertainment of the game during the big hit game (during the round) can be improved by the notification effect according to whether the effect state is the A mode or the B mode.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12B to 12D, every time the total number of game balls acquired exceeds a multiple of 500, the first notification image 213 provides a notification effect by acquiring a game ball. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12E to 12G, every time the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500, the second notification image 214 is used to generate a notification effect by acquiring a game ball. Therefore, by diversifying the notification effects, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round).

  In addition, as shown in the acquired total number display image 224 of the A mode and the acquired total number display image 225 of the B mode in FIG. A display in which the sphere increases by 10 is performed. Therefore, since the number of assigned game balls can be variably displayed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round) by changing the display of the total number of acquisitions.

  In addition, a mode selection image 210 for selecting whether to set the A mode or the B mode during the round is displayed. Therefore, since it becomes possible to select the production state during the round, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round).

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the command analysis process executed in S704 of FIG. In particular, FIG. 13 illustrates various flags that are set when a game ball is won at the grand prize opening. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 13, the effect control CPU 101 first receives a command received from the main board 31 transmitted via the relay board 77 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (S511). When there is no received command (N in S511), the effect control CPU 101 ends the command analysis process.

  On the other hand, when there is a reception command (Y in S511), the production control CPU 101 confirms whether the reception command is a big prize winning notification command or not by checking the MODE data of the reception command, for example. Determination is made (S512). In the case of a prize winning prize winning notification command (Y in S512), the effect control CPU 101 counts the number of prize winning mouth prizes, which is the stored value of the prize winning counter number provided in the effect control counter setting unit. The value is updated to add 1 (S513). The grand prize winning number count value indicates the number of times that a game ball has won a big winning opening from the time a round is executed until the next round is executed. Then, the production control CPU 101 sets a special prize winning prize flag provided in the production control flag setting unit (S514), and proceeds to the processing of S515. The grand prize winning flag is a flag that is set every time a game ball wins a prize winning opening.

  In S515, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is an overwinning. For example, the updated winning prize count count value after the update is a predetermined over-winning determination value (a value larger than the winning upper-limit determination value. In this embodiment, since the upper-limit winning determination value is “10”, the over-winning determination is made) It may be determined whether or not the value is “11”). If it is not over-winning (N in S515), the effect control CPU 101 ends the command analysis processing. On the other hand, when it is over-winning (Y in S515), the effect control CPU 101 sets an over-winning flag (S516) and ends the command analysis processing. The over-winning flag is a flag that is set every time a game ball wins a prize winning limit exceeding a winning upper limit determination value.

  In S512, when the received command is not the big prize winning notification command (N in S512), the effect control CPU 101 performs setting according to the received command (S517), and ends the command analysis process.

  14 and 15 are flowcharts showing the round process (S805) in the effect control process. In the mid-round processing, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the designation command reception flag after the special winning opening is opened is set (S920). Here, a flag such as a designated command reception flag after opening the big prize opening is set by the effect control CPU 101 when the received command is stored in the command reception buffer formed in the RAM 103, and the big hit game ends. Is erased at a predetermined timing.

  The effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S921) if the designation command reception flag after opening the big prize opening is not set (N in S920). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control executes control of the effect device (the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the frame LED 28, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n) (S922). For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the effect during the round on the effect display device 9, the image data is read from the ROM 102 according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n), and the read image data is output to the VDP 109. At the same time, a control signal is output. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control various lamps to be turned on / off. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the start time of the first round (S923). Whether or not it is the first round can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command. If it is determined that it is the start of the first round (Y in S923), the effect control CPU 101 displays a mode selection screen as shown in FIG. 12A (S924), and proceeds to the processing of S925. To do. On the other hand, if the CPU 101 for effect control determines that it is not the start of the first round (N in S923), the process proceeds to S928 without performing the processes from S924 to S926.

  In S925, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the selected mode is the A mode. When the selected mode is the A mode (Y in S925), the effect control CPU 101 sets the A mode flag (S926), and proceeds to the process of S928. On the other hand, if the selected mode is not the A mode (N in S925), the effect control CPU 101 sets the B mode flag (S927), and proceeds to the processing of S928. Here, when the player does not select the mode while displaying the mode selection screen, the A mode set as the initial value is selected.

  Next, in S928, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the big prize opening prize flag is set. The grand prize winning flag is a flag set in S514 of FIG. 13, and is set every time a game ball is awarded to the big winning opening. The effect control CPU 101 resets the big prize opening prize flag (S929) when the big prize opening prize flag is set (Y in S928), and proceeds to the process of S932. On the other hand, when the big prize winning prize flag is not set (N in S928), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the over winning flag is set (S930). The over-winning flag is a flag that is set in S516 of FIG. 13, and is a flag that is set when an over-winning to the big winning opening occurs.

  When the over-winning flag is set (Y in S930), the effect control CPU 101 resets the over-winning flag (S931), and proceeds to the processing of S932. On the other hand, when the over-winning flag is not set (N in S930), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S940 without performing the processes of S932 and S933.

  In S932, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter, updates the acquired total number display (total acquired number display) according to the mode (S933), and proceeds to the process of S940. In S933, for example, as shown in FIG. 12B and FIG. 12E, the acquired total number display image 224 in the A mode and the acquired total number display image 225 in the B mode are won by the game ball in the big winning opening. Every time you do it, it will increase by 10. It should be noted that the processing for updating the display of the total number of acquisitions may also be executed when a game ball wins a winning opening other than the big winning opening during the round.

  In S940, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the A mode flag is set. When the A mode flag is set (Y in S940), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S941. On the other hand, when the A mode flag is not set (that is, when the B mode flag is set) (N in S940), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S943.

  In S941, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 500. When the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 500 (Y in S941), the effect control CPU 101 notifies the number of acquired game balls by displaying the A mode (S942), and proceeds to the process of S945. To do. For example, the display in the A mode is a display of the first notification image 213 and the girl image 221 when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 500, as shown in FIGS. Change). The display in the A mode is continuously displayed until the next display update. On the other hand, when the total number of acquired game balls does not exceed a multiple of 500 (N in S941), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S945 without performing the process of S942.

  In S943, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500. When the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500 (Y in S943), the effect control CPU 101 notifies the number of acquired game balls by displaying the B mode (S944), and proceeds to the process of S945. To do. For example, the display in the B mode is a process of displaying the second notification image 214 when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500, as shown in FIGS. Here, the display of the second notification image 214 in the B mode is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed. For example, it is displayed when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500 and is erased after 2 seconds. Note that the display of the second notification image 214 may be deleted at the timing when the round being executed ends. On the other hand, when the total number of game balls acquired does not exceed a multiple of 2500 (N in S943), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S945 without performing the process of S944.

  In S945, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the process timer has timed out. When the process timer has timed out (Y in S945), the effect control CPU 101 starts the next process timer (S946) and controls the effect device according to the contents of the next process data (S947). The process during the round ends. On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out (N in S945), the effect control CPU 101 ends the in-round processing without performing the processing of S946 and S947.

  In S920, the effect control CPU 101 resets the designation command reception flag after opening the big prize opening if the designation command reception flag after opening the big prize opening is set (Y in S920) (S934). Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects an interval effect (an effect of performing interval display according to the number of rounds), and selects process data according to the selected interval effect (S935). Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts a process timer (S936), sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (S806) (S937), and ends the in-round processing.

  In the process of S930 to S932 in FIG. 14, after the process of adding the winning ball in the over winning is executed, the acquired total number display image 224 in the A mode and the acquired total number display image 225 in the B mode are the winning prizes of the game balls. A variable display of the total number of acquisitions which is incremented by 10 every time a winning is made to the mouth is performed. In this way, the notification effect is executed after adding the number of game balls awarded by winning 11 or 12 more than 10 game balls in one unit game. An appropriate notification effect can be executed.

  FIG. 14 shows a case where the total number of acquired game balls is determined after determining whether or not the A mode flag is set in S940. However, the total number of game balls acquired is determined first, and when the determination value exceeds a predetermined number, an image to be displayed is determined by checking whether the mode is the A mode or the B mode. You may do it.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the second embodiment, a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a game by a notification effect that is executed when a certain number of game media win a predetermined number more than a predetermined number will be described. For example, such a gaming machine is as follows.

  (1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a game medium (for example, a game ball) is easily won in a first state (for example, an open state) and a game medium is difficult to win. Variable winning means that can be changed to a second state (for example, a closed state) (for example, a special variable that executes a notification effect in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on a probability variation big hit. Variable winning means until at least one of a winning ball apparatus (large winning mouth)) and a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of game media are won. Advantageous state control means (e.g., controllable to advantageous state (for example, big hit gaming state) in which a unit game (for example, round) that can be changed to the first state is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds) The advantageous state control means has at least a first advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state based on a probable big hit) and an advantageous degree over the first advantageous state as an advantageous state. It is controllable to a low second advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit), and in one unit game in the first advantageous state, a specific number (for example, the eleventh and 12th game media) is greater than a predetermined number. Individual) Based on the winning (for example, the occurrence of over-winning), a notification effect in a special manner (for example, the first large winning opening LED 20c is rainbow-lighted and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27) The notification effect executing means (for example, the notification effect of the mode) (for example, the probability change state is controlled based on the fact that the probability change big hit is achieved) In the gaming machine configured as described above, a notification effect is executed, and the game machine further includes a portion for executing the same processing as steps S3923 and S3924 in the effect control microcomputer 100. According to such a configuration, by executing the notification effect in a special mode based on the fact that a certain number of game media has been won in a unit game in the first advantageous state in a number greater than a predetermined number, Interest can be improved.

  (2) Another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) is easily won in a first state (for example, an open state) and a game Variable winning means (for example, a first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a (first big prize opening), a second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b (the medium is changeable to a second state where the medium is difficult to win (for example, a closed state)) The second prize winning opening)) and a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game media are won. Advantageous state control means (for example, for game control) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, big hit gaming state) in which a unit game (for example, round) that can be changed to one state is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds) Microcomputer And a special state (for example, a probable change state) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the second big prize opening) provided in the variable winning means in the advantageous state. Possible special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) and a specific number of game media more than a predetermined number in one unit game in the advantageous state after the game medium has passed through the specific region in the advantageous state (for example, , Eleventh and twelfth) based on the winning (for example, the occurrence of an over-winning), a notification effect in a special manner (for example, the first grand prize winning LED 20c is rainbow-lighted and a predetermined amount is given from the speaker 27) Notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control microcomputer) capable of executing a notification effect in a mode of outputting a winning sound. And a step for executing steps S3923 and S3924 in step 100). According to such a configuration, after the game medium has passed through the specific area, the notification effect in the special mode is executed based on the fact that the game medium has won a specific number greater than a predetermined number in one unit game in the advantageous state. By this, the interest of the game by notification production can be improved.

  (3) In (1), the notification effect executing means does not execute the notification effect in a special mode when a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the second advantageous state (for example, a probable big hit). In the game machine that is configured to be controlled to the probability change state based on the fact that the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that it is usually a big hit, it does not execute steps S3923 and S3924) It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, in the second advantageous state, by preventing the notification effect in the special mode from being executed, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game by the notification effect from decreasing.

  (4) In (2), when the game medium has won a specific number of game media in one unit game in an advantageous state before the game medium passes through the specific area, the notification effect execution means performs the notification effect in a special mode. It may be configured not to execute (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 does not execute steps S3923 and S3924 when N is determined in steps S3921 and S3922). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the entertainment interest of the game by the notification effect from being lowered by not performing the notification effect by the special mode before the game medium passes through the specific area. it can.

  (5) In (1) or (3), the notification effect executing means, based on the fact that less than a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the advantageous state, the notification effect (for example, the first large game) (A notification effect of a mode in which the winning opening LED 20c and the second large winning opening LED 20d emit white light) can be executed (for example, a portion in which step S3925 is executed when N in step S3920), and one unit game in the second advantageous state When a certain number of game media are won, a notification effect according to a normal mode is executed (for example, a notification effect is executed in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on a probability variation big hit. If the production control microcomputer 100 determines that it is a normal big hit, it executes step S3925. It may be configured so. According to such a configuration, in the second advantageous state, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by executing the notification effect in the normal mode instead of the notification effect in the special mode.

  (6) In (2) or (4), the notification effect executing means, based on the fact that less than a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the advantageous state, the notification effect (for example, the first large game) Before the game medium passes through the specific area, for example, a notification effect of a mode in which the winning opening LED 20c or the second large winning opening LED 20d emits white light). In addition, when a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the advantageous state, a notification effect according to a normal mode is executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is N in steps S3921 and S3922 when step N is performed). (S3925 may be executed). According to such a configuration, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by executing the notification effect in the normal mode instead of the notification effect in the special mode before the game medium passes through the specific area.

  (7) In any one of (1), (3), and (5), when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, a predetermined game value is given (for example, controlled to a probability change state) That a specific effect execution means (for example, a promotion effect executed in the same or similar manner as in FIGS. 19 (2) to (6)) can be executed (for example, a probable big hit) In the game machine configured to be controlled to a probable state based on it, the effect control microcomputer 100 includes a part that executes the same processing as S3928), and the notification effect execution means includes: If a specific number of game media wins in one unit game in the first advantageous state before executing the specific effect, the notification effect in the special mode is not executed (for example, the probability variation big hit In the game machine that is configured to be controlled to be in a probable state based on the performance effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the promotion effect is executed from the first round to the fifth round. Steps S3923 and S3924 are not executed). When a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the first advantageous state after executing the specific effect, a notification effect in a special mode is executed (for example, probable big hit In the game machine that is configured to be controlled to be in a probabilistic state based on the fact that the presentation effect is executed, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the rounds after the sixth round after the promotion effect is executed. If it is determined that there is, step S3923, S3924 may be executed) Yes. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the notification effect by executing the notification effect in a special mode after executing the specific effect.

  (8) In any one of (2), (4), or (6), specially based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the second big prize opening) in an advantageous state. Special effect execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S3908 to S3916 in the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of executing an effect (for example, probability change confirmation notification) is provided, and the notification effect execution means has a specific region in the advantageous state. When a specific number of game media are won in a unit game (for example, the sixth round) through which the game media have passed, the notification effect in a special mode is not executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is in the sixth round. In this case, it is determined that N is determined in step S3921, and steps S3923 and S3924 are not executed). It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution of the special effect from being disturbed by the notification effect in the special mode, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the performance from being deteriorated.

  (9) In any one of (1) to (8), the notification effect executing means emits light by the light emitter (for example, rainbow light emission of the first grand prize winning LED 20c) and sound output as the notification effect in a special mode. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S3923 and S3925) including an effect including (for example, a sound output of a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 27). According to such a configuration, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by the effect using the light emission and sound output by the light emitter.

  (10) In any one of (1) to (9), a predetermined effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect (for example, a prize ball number notification effect, a winning number notification effect, a cumulative prize ball number notification effect, a cumulative winning number) A notification effect, a probability change confirmation notification effect, a continuous change number notification, a jackpot music name notification, a right-handed notification, an error notification, and an effect control CPU 101 for executing a jackpot promotion effect). As a first predetermined effect (for example, a prize ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during the big hit game) and the special period It is possible to execute a second predetermined effect for notifying the magnitude of the acquired value (for example, a prize ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during a big hit game in a continuous game). The priority is different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect (for example, when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed). May be. According to such a configuration, a plurality of predetermined effects can be suitably executed.

  (11) In any one of (1) to (10), the notification effect executing means is configured to receive a first specified number (for example, eleventh) of winnings greater than a predetermined number and the first specified number of winnings. The notification effect is executed using a sound output channel that is different from the second specific number (for example, the twelfth) winning that is the next winning (for example, the effect controlling microcomputer 100 is the eleventh (over winning 1). The first notification effect may be executed on the reproduction channel Ch0 in the first), and the second notification effect may be executed on the reproduction channel Ch1 in the twelfth (second over-winning)). According to such a configuration, the notification effect can be executed on different channels for the first specific number of winnings greater than the predetermined number and the second specific number of winnings that is the next winning of the first specific number of winnings. A decrease in the interest of the player can be prevented. In addition, the notification effect can be executed even when more than a predetermined number of winnings occur at short intervals.

  The second embodiment will be described in more detail. Here, in the second embodiment, it is assumed that the first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a is provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 15. The first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big win symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and on the second special symbol display 8b, a specific display result (big hit) In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21a, so that the first big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball won in the first grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. In addition, a first special prize opening LED 20c is provided inside the first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a. In the present embodiment, the first big prize opening LED 20c is realized by a multi-color LED.

  In addition, it is assumed that a second special variable winning ball device 20b is provided below the first special variable winning ball device 20a. The second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21b, so that the second big prize opening that becomes the winning area is opened. A game ball won in the second grand prize opening is detected by the second count switch 23b. In the present embodiment, a specific area is provided downstream of the area in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b where the second count switch 23b is provided. It is detected by the specific detection switch 22. In the present embodiment, the second count switch 23b is provided on the upstream side, and the specific detection switch 22 is provided on the downstream side thereof. Therefore, the second count switch 23b is detected by winning the second big prize opening. Almost all of the game balls that have been made win a specific area and are detected by the specific detection switch 22. In this embodiment, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second count switch 23b, and the probability change state is controlled based on the detection by the specific detection switch 22. It is confirmed that In addition, a second special prize opening LED 20d is provided inside the second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b. In this embodiment, the second grand prize opening LED 20d is realized by a multi-color LED.

  In the present embodiment, the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. In a specific gaming state (a big hit gaming state) that sometimes occurs, the second big prize opening is controlled to be open in the sixth round, and the first big winning opening is controlled to be open in rounds other than the sixth round. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a specific area in the second big winning opening in the sixth round during the big hit game, it is determined that the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state after the big hit game ends.

  In the present embodiment, if the winning in the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening has occurred as the processing during the round, the production control CPU 101 performs the first grand prize winning LED 20c or the second grand prize winning. The mouth LED 20d is controlled to emit white light. In this case, if it is a round other than the sixth round during the big hit game, the first big prize opening is controlled to be in the open state, and thus the first big prize opening LED 20c is controlled to emit white light. In the sixth round, since the second big prize opening is controlled to be in the open state, the second big prize opening LED 20d is controlled to emit white light. Whether or not it is the sixth round can be determined, for example, by confirming the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command.

  FIGS. 16-18 is a flowchart which shows the round post-process (S806) in the presentation control process process of 2nd Embodiment. In the round post-processing, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (S3901). When the big hit end designation command reception flag is not set (N in S3901), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open designation command has been received is set. (S3902). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in S3902), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S3903), and the effect device (effect display device 9) according to the contents of the process data n , Speaker 27, LED 28, etc.) are executed (S3904).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (S3905), and if the process timer has timed out (Y in S3905), the process data is switched (S3906). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer to start the process timer (S3907), and the process proceeds to S3908. On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (N in S3905), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S3908 without performing the processes of S3906 and S3907.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability change confirmation notification flag is set (S3908). If the probability change confirmation notification flag is set (that is, a probability change confirmation notification designation command indicating that it is determined that the state is controlled to the probability change state transmitted by passing through the specific area in the second big prize opening is received. If so (Y in S3908), the CPU 101 for effect control resets the certainty change confirmation notification flag (S3909). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the certainty change confirmation notification in the effect display device 9 (S3910). Further, the production control CPU 101 sets a probability change confirmation notification in-progress flag and sets a value corresponding to the execution period of the probability change confirmation notification (for example, a value corresponding to 1.0 seconds) in the production period measurement timer 1. (S3911), the process proceeds to S3912. On the other hand, if the probability change confirmation notification flag is not set (N in S3908), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S3912 without performing the processes of S3909 to S3911.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability change confirmation notification executing flag is set (S3912). If the certain change confirmation notification in-progress flag is set (that is, if certain change confirmation notification is being executed) (Y in S3912), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer 1 (S3913). ), It is confirmed whether or not the value of the production period measurement timer 1 after subtraction has become 0 (S3914). If the value of the effect period measurement timer 1 after subtraction is 0 (Y in S3914), the effect control CPU 101 ends the execution of the probability change confirmation notification in the effect display device 9 (S3915). Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the probability variation confirmation notification execution flag, sets a probability variation confirmation notification flag indicating that the probability variation determination notification has been executed (S3916), and proceeds to the processing of S3917.

  In S3912, if the probability change confirmation notification in-execution flag is not set (N in S3912), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S3917 without performing the processes of S3913 to S3916. In S3914, if the value of the effect period measurement timer 1 after subtraction is not 0 (N in S3914), the process proceeds to S3917 without performing the processes in S3915 and S3916.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big prize opening prize flag is set (S3917). If the big prize winning flag is not set (N in S3917), the effect control CPU 101 ends the post-round processing. On the other hand, if the winning prize winning flag is set (that is, if a winning to the first winning prize opening or the second winning prize occurs and a winning prize winning designation command is received) (S3917). Y), the production control CPU 101 resets the big prize winning prize flag (S3918). The effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter (S3919), and checks whether the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more (S3920).

  If the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more, it is a case where an over winning to the big winning opening has occurred. The “over winning” is, for example, in the present embodiment, the upper limit number of game balls to be awarded to the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening for each round during the big hit game (10 in this example). However, the game ball is awarded to the first grand prize opening or the second big prize opening exceeding the upper limit number. For example, in the present embodiment, even before a predetermined opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses in each round during the big hit game, the tenth to the first grand prize opening and the second big prize opening If a winning is detected, the first grand prize opening and the second big prize opening are controlled to be closed, but a game ball has won just before the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening are closed. In some cases, an eleventh or twelfth prize may be awarded and an over-winning may occur.

  If the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more (that is, if an over winning has occurred) (Y in S3920), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a round after the seventh round. Is confirmed (S3921). Whether the round is the seventh round or later can be determined, for example, by confirming the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command.

  If it is a round after the seventh round (Y in S3921), the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the probability variation confirmed notification flag is set (S3922). If the probability change confirmation notification flag is set (that is, if the probability change confirmation notification has already ended) (Y in S3922), the effect control CPU 101 causes the first big prize opening LED 20c to emit rainbow light (for example, (S3923) A control is performed to sequentially emit light in a plurality of colors such as red, blue, and yellow. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to output a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 27 (S3924), and ends the post-round processing.

  In the present embodiment, the first big prize opening is only controlled to be open in the seventh and subsequent rounds, so in S3923 there is only a case where the first big prize opening LED 20c is caused to emit rainbow light. The second grand prize winning LED 20d may also be controlled to emit rainbow light.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the processing of S3920 to S3924 is executed only in the post-round processing is shown, but the processing mode is not limited thereto. For example, the same process as S3920 to S3924 may be executed in the round process. If configured in this way, for example, even if the program is configured to perform processing during the round until all the game balls won in the first grand prize winning opening and the second big winning prize opening are detected, the over winning prize is obtained. The first grand prize winning LED 20c can emit rainbow light or a predetermined winning sound can be output as a sound.

  When the value of the winning counter after the addition is not 11 or more (that is, not over-winning) (N in S3920), or when it is not the round after the seventh round (that is, the first to sixth rounds) Case) (N in S3921), if the probability change confirmation notification flag is not set (that is, if the probability change confirmation notification has not yet been completed) (N in S3922), the CPU 101 for effect control is the first The control for causing the special winning opening LED 20c or the second special winning opening LED 20d to emit white light is performed (S3925), and the post-round processing is ended. In this case, if it is a round other than the sixth round during the big hit game, the first big prize opening is controlled to be in the open state, and thus the first big prize opening LED 20c is controlled to emit white light. In the sixth round, since the second big prize opening is controlled to be in the open state, the second big prize opening LED 20d is controlled to emit white light. Whether or not it is the sixth round can be determined, for example, by confirming the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball is won in the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening by executing the processing in round S3917 to S3925 of the post-round processing, at least the first winning ball is won. A notification effect for causing the special winning opening LED 20c and the second special winning opening LED 20d to emit light is executed. In particular, by executing the processes of S3920 to S3924, in the present embodiment, when an overwinning occurs, the game medium is won in a specific area in the second big prize opening, and the probability change confirmation notification is executed. Thereafter, in the case of a round after the seventh round of the big hit game, the notification effect is executed in such a manner that the first grand prize opening LED 20c emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27. When over-winning occurs in such a manner, the notification effect is executed in a special mode different from the normal mode (in this example, the first large winning port LED 20c and the second large winning port LED 20d emit white light). It is possible to improve the interest of the game by the notification effect.

  However, in the present embodiment, even when an over winning is generated by executing the determination processes of S3921 and S3922, it is before the game ball is won in a specific area in the second big winning opening. Does not execute a notification effect in a special manner. In this way, by preventing the notification effect in the special mode from being executed before the game ball is won in the specific area, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game due to the notification effect from decreasing. Further, in this embodiment, when S3921 and S3922 are N, the process proceeds to S3925 so that even when a game ball is won in a specific area in the second big prize opening even if an overwinning occurs. In this case, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed. Thus, before the game ball wins a specific area, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed instead of the notification effect in the special mode, thereby improving the effect of the notification effect.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by performing the determination process of S3921, the second big prize opening is controlled to be in an open state, and an over win has occurred in the sixth round in which a game ball may win in a specific area. In this case, the notification effect in the special mode is not executed (in this example, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed). With such a configuration, in this embodiment, in the sixth round in which the probability change confirmation notification may be executed, the notification effect in the special mode is not executed in the sixth round, so that the probability change confirmation notification is performed by the notification effect in the special mode. The execution is prevented from being hindered, and the production effect is prevented from being lowered.

  In the present embodiment, by performing the determination process of S3921 and S3922, the game medium is won in a specific area in the second grand prize opening and the probability change confirmation notification is executed, and then the seventh round and subsequent rounds of the big hit game are executed. In the case of a round, the case where the first grand prize opening LED 20c emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27 is shown, but such a processing mode is not limited. For example, when an over win occurs, it is determined whether the jackpot type is an advantageous jackpot that can be controlled to a probable state or an unfavorable jackpot that is not substantially controlled to a probable state, and is an advantageous jackpot If determined, the first grand prize winning LED 20c may be configured to emit rainbow light and to output a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 27. In addition, it is determined whether or not the game medium has won a specific area in the second big prize opening shown in the present embodiment and the probability change confirmation notification is executed, and whether or not it is the above-mentioned advantageous big hit. , The rainbow light emission of the first grand prize winning LED 20c and the sound output of a predetermined prize winning sound may be executed, or a game medium is placed in a specific area in the second grand prize winning mouth. Both the determination whether or not the winning change notification is executed after winning a prize and the determination whether or not it is an advantageous big hit are executed, and the rainbow light emission of the first big winning opening LED 20c and a predetermined amount are determined. Sound output of a winning sound may be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of large winning opening winning designation commands received using the winning counter on the side of the production control microcomputer 100 is counted, and the over winning is based on the value of the winning counter being 11 or more. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 side may determine whether or not the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening is 11 or more to determine whether or not an over winning has occurred. Depending on whether or not it is an over-winning, a different winning prize winning designation command is transmitted, and on the side of the production control microcomputer 100, which winning prize winning designation command is received, You may comprise so that it may be recognized whether it is an overwinning.

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in S3902), the effect control CPU 101 resets the big prize opening open flag (S3926).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the next round to be started is the second to fifth rounds (S3927). Whether it is the second round to the fifth round can be determined, for example, by confirming the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command. If the next round to be started is the second to fifth rounds (Y in S3927), the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the round including the promotion effect (S3928), and the process of S3930 Migrate to On the other hand, if it is not the second to fifth rounds (that is, if the next round to be started is a round after the sixth round) (N in S3927), the production control CPU 101 produces an effect during the normal round (promotion) The process table corresponding to the effect during the round not including the effect is selected (S3929), and the process proceeds to S3930.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the roulette effect is executed in the effect display device 9 as the promotion effect. In this case, when starting the first round to the fourth round, in S3928, a process table including an effect in a form in which the sphere rotates the roulette is selected as the promotion effect. Further, when starting the fifth round, in S3928, the type of jackpot type is specified, and it is not expected to win a specific area in the second big winning opening (it is expected to be controlled to be probable change state). In the case of a big hit, a process table is selected that includes an effect in such a manner that the roulette result is out of place as the promotion effect. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit that is likely to win a specific area in the second big prize opening (highly likely to be controlled in a probabilistic state), an effect in which the result of the roulette is a win is given as a promotion effect. Select the process table that contains it. Note that the type of jackpot can be determined by, for example, confirming the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer (S3930), and produces the production device (production as a production component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the display device 9, various lamps as a production component, and the speaker 27 as a production component is executed (S3931). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer 1 (S3932).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 initializes a winning counter (S3933). That is, the value of the winning counter is set to zero.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the in-round process (S805) (S3934), and ends the post-round process.

  When the big hit end designation command reception flag is set in S3901 (Y in S3901), the effect control CPU 101 resets the big hit end designation command reception flag (S3935).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the ending effect (S3936). Further, the effect control CPU 101 measures a value corresponding to the ending period at the end of the big hit game (for example, a value corresponding to 3.0 seconds) for the effect period of the ending effect executed at the end of the big hit game. The effect period measurement timer is set (S3937).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer (S3938), and produces the production device (production as a production component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the display device 9, various lamps as a production component, and the speaker 27 as a production component is executed (S3939).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S807) (S3940), and ends the post-round process.

  Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the notification effect will be described. 19 and 20 are explanatory diagrams illustrating a specific example of the effect form of the notification effect according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, the effect mode transitions in the order of (1) (2) (3).

  As shown in FIG. 19 (1), the left, middle and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and a big hit occurs. As shown in FIG. 19 (2), the first round is started and the big hit game starts. It shall be assumed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 19 (6), promotion effects are also executed in the first round to the fifth round (see S3928). In the example shown in FIG. 19 (2), the case where the promotion effect is started by displaying the image 230 in a mode in which the ball rotates the roulette on the effect display device 9 is shown.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 19 (3), when a winning in the big winning opening occurs during the big hit game round, the notification effect is executed in the normal mode. In the example shown in FIG. 19 (3), a case where a game ball is won at the first grand prize opening and the notification effect is executed in such a manner that the first big prize opening LED 20c emits white light is shown.

  Further, even when the number of wins to the big winning opening reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 in this example) and the round is ended, an over win may occur. In this case, as shown in FIG. 19 (4), even if an overwinning occurs, the game ball is won in a specific area in the second big winning opening in the round before the sixth round and the probability changes. If it is before the definite notification is executed, the notification effect is executed in the normal mode. In the example shown in FIG. 19 (4), there is shown a case in which an over-winning to the first big prize opening occurs and the notification effect is executed in a mode in which the first big prize opening LED 20c emits white light (see S3925). ).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19 (5), the second and subsequent rounds are executed in the same manner, and when it becomes the fifth round as shown in FIG. Promotional effects in various modes are executed. In the example shown in FIG. 19 (6), based on the big hit type with the big hit type being the probable big hit, the ball enters the area indicated as “probable” in the roulette, and the result of the roulette wins (probable change). The case where the promotion effect is executed is shown by the mode of displaying the character string 231 such as “there is a certain degree of promotion!” While displaying the image of the mode that becomes the result that suggests the state. When the big hit type is a big hit that is not a probable big hit (usually a big hit), for example, the ball enters the area other than the area marked “probable” in the roulette, and the roulette results are out of place (probable change). A promotion effect is executed in such a manner that an image of a mode that results in a suggestion that the status is not reached is displayed, and a character string such as “no probability change promotion!” Is displayed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where a roulette effect is performed is shown as a promotion effect, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, as a promotion effect, it is suggested that enemies and allies' characters battle, and that the ally character wins the battle, or that the ally character loses the battle, A directing effect may be executed. Also, for example, as a promotion effect, an effect such as displaying an fortune is performed, suggesting that if the result of the fortune is `` good '', it will be in a probable state, or if the result of the fortune is `` bad '', the probable state An effect that suggests that it is not possible may be executed. As such, any promotion effect can be used as long as it is possible to ask whether or not it is controlled in a certain variation state in some manner.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the promotion effect is performed over the first to fifth rounds, and the result of the promotion effect is notified in the final fifth round (in this example, the result of the roulette is notified). However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, you may comprise so that the result notification of a promotion effect is possible also in the 1st round-the 4th round, without waiting for the 5th round. In this case, if it is after the notification of the result of the promotion effect, the notification effect in the special mode may be executed when the over winning prize is generated without waiting for the fifth round or the sixth round.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19 (7), the process shifts to the sixth round and the second big prize opening is controlled to be in the open state. Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (7), in the sixth round, the game ball wins the second big prize opening, and the game ball wins a specific area in the second big prize opening, and is controlled to be in a probable state. Is determined. The example shown in FIG. 19 (7) also shows that the notification effect is executed in such a manner that the second grand prize opening LED 20d emits white light because the game ball has won the second big prize opening during the sixth round. Has been. Further, based on the fact that it is determined to be controlled to the probability change state, execution of the probability change confirmation notification is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 19 (8), a case where a character string 232 such as “probability change confirmed!” Is displayed on the effect display device 9 as the probability change confirmation notification is shown.

  In FIG. 19 (7), when a game ball wins a specific area in the second big prize opening (especially when the first game ball wins in the specific area), the second big prize opening LED 20d. The first grand prize opening LED 20c may emit light with a dedicated light emission color (for example, light emission in red different from the special effect notification effect) or a special prize sound (for example, different from the special effect notification effect). A special winning sound) may be output.

  In addition, even when the number of wins in the second grand prize opening in the sixth round reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 in this example) and the round is over, an over win may occur. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20 (9), even if an overwinning has occurred, if it is the sixth round in which probability change confirmation notification may be executed, the notification effect is executed in the normal mode. Is done. In the example shown in FIG. 20 (9), there is shown a case where the over-winning to the second big prize opening occurs and the notification effect is executed in a mode in which the second big prize opening LED 20d emits white light (see S3925). ).

  Next, the process proceeds to rounds after the seventh round. Even in the rounds after the seventh round, as shown in FIG. 20 (10), when a winning in the big winning opening occurs during the big hit game round, the notification effect is executed in the normal mode. In the example shown in FIG. 20 (10), a case where a game ball is won at the first grand prize opening and the notification effect is executed in a mode in which the first big prize opening LED 20c emits white light is shown.

  On the other hand, when an overwinning occurs in the rounds after the seventh round, as shown in FIG. 20 (11), the notification effect is executed in a special mode different from the normal mode. In the example shown in FIG. 20 (11), an over-winning to the first grand prize opening occurs, the first grand prize opening LED 20c is caused to emit rainbow light, and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27 as a notification effect. Is shown (see S3923 and S3924).

  In the present embodiment, a case where a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27 only in the case of the notification effect in the special mode is shown, but the notification effect in the normal mode is executed without being limited to such a mode. In some cases, some winning sound (same or different sound as in the case of the special mode) may be output.

  In the present embodiment, as a notification effect in a special mode, the first grand prize opening LED 20c is caused to emit rainbow light, and a mode in which a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27 is executed. It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the first grand prize opening LED 20c may simply emit rainbow light and may not be accompanied by a sound output of a winning sound. In addition, for example, if the light emitting color is different from the notification effect according to the normal mode, the first grand prize winning LED 20c is caused to emit light with a light emitting color (for example, red or yellow) other than the rainbow light emission. Also good. Further, for example, instead of causing the first grand prize winning LED 20c to emit rainbow light, an effect of outputting a sound imitating a voice of a predetermined character may be executed as a notification effect in a special mode. As such, various types of effects can be considered as notification effects in a special aspect.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, a predetermined period (29 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number of game media (game balls in this example) (10 in this example). It is possible to change the variable winning means (in this example, the first grand prize opening, the second big prize opening) to the first state (in this example, the open state) until at least one of winning is established. Can be controlled in an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit gaming state) in which a predetermined number of unit games (in this example, rounds) are executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds). Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (in this example, the specific area in the second big prize opening), it can be controlled to a special state (in this example, the probability variation state). In addition, after the game medium passes through the specific area in the advantageous state, the game medium has won a specific number (for example, 11th and 12th) more than a predetermined number in one unit game in the advantageous state (in this example, Based on the fact that an over winning has occurred), a notification effect in a special mode (in this example, a notification effect of a mode in which the first big prize opening LED 20c emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27). It is feasible. Therefore, after the game medium has passed through the specific area, a notification effect in a special mode different from the normal mode is executed based on the fact that a specific number of game media has been won in a unit game in an advantageous state that is greater than a predetermined number. Thus, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the notification effect.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the predetermined number of times that the unit game (round) is executed in the jackpot game is 15 times (15 rounds) is shown. May be. Further, the predetermined number of times may be once or twice. For example, when there is a sudden probability change big hit or a small hit that opens the big prize opening once or twice, the sudden probability change big hit or You may comprise so that the overwinning in a small hit can also be detected.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, when a specific number of game media wins in one unit game in the advantageous state before the game media pass through the specific area, the notification effect in the special mode is not executed. Therefore, by preventing the notification effect in the special mode from being executed before the game medium passes through the specific area, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game by the notification effect from decreasing.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, based on the fact that less than a specific number of game media have been won in one unit game in the advantageous state, the notification effect according to the normal mode (in this example, the first big prize opening LED 20c and the second big prize The notification effect in a mode in which the winning opening LED 20d emits white light can be executed. In addition, when a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in an advantageous state before the game media pass through the specific area, a notification effect in the normal mode is executed. Therefore, before the game medium passes through the specific area, it is possible to improve the effect of the notification effect by executing the notification effect in the normal mode instead of the notification effect in the special mode.

  In the present embodiment, when an over winning occurs before a game ball wins a specific area in the second grand prize opening, a notification effect in the normal mode is executed instead of the notification effect in the special mode. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when an over-winning occurs before a game ball wins a specific area in the second big winning opening, a notification effect may not be executed at all.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect (in this example, probability change confirmation notification) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the advantageous state. Then, when a specific number of game media wins in a unit game (in this example, the sixth round) in which the game media has passed through a specific area in the advantageous state, a notification effect in a special mode is not executed (in this example, special The notification effect according to the normal mode is executed instead of the notification effect according to the mode). For this reason, it is possible to prevent the execution of the special effect from being disturbed by the notification effect in the special mode, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from decreasing.

  In the present embodiment, in the sixth round in which the probability change confirmation notification is executed, only the notification effect in the special mode is not executed, and the notification effect in the normal mode (in this example, the first big prize opening LED 20c or the second Although the notification effect of the mode in which the special winning opening LED 20d emits white light is shown to be executed, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the sixth round in which the probability change confirmation notification is executed, both the notification effect in the special mode and the notification effect in the normal mode may not be executed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as a notification effect in a special mode, light emission by the light emitter (in this example, rainbow light emission of the first big prize LED 20c) and sound output (in this example, a predetermined prize from the speaker 27) The production including the sound output of the sound is executed. Therefore, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by the effect using the light emission and sound output by the light emitter.

[Modification]
In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where it comprises so that it may be controlled to a probable change state based on having won the game ball to the specific area | region provided in the 2nd big winning opening is shown, I can't catch it. For example, as a big hit type, a normal big hit (a big hit that is not controlled in a promiscuous state after a big hit game; it may be controlled to a short-time state or a high base state after a big hit game) and a positive big hit (a positive change after a big hit game). (It is also possible to control the short-time state or the high base state together with the probability variation state.) So that the probability variation state is controlled based on the fact that the probability variation big hit is achieved. In the gaming machine configured as described above, a configuration for executing the notification effect shown in the present embodiment may be applied. Hereinafter, a modified example in which a notification effect is executed in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on the probability variation big hit will be described.

  In the present modification, the specific area need not be provided in the special winning opening, and only one special variable winning ball apparatus (large winning opening) may be provided.

  When the notification effect is executed in the gaming machine configured to be controlled to the probability variation state based on the probability variation big hit, at least the first advantageous state (in this example) as the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state). In, in this example, it is possible to control a big hit gaming state based on a probable big hit) and a second advantageous state (a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit (non-probable big hit) in this example) having a lower advantage than the first advantageous state. . Based on the fact that one of the unit games in the first advantageous state among them wins a specific number (for example, the eleventh and twelfth) more than a predetermined number (for example, ten in this example), A notification effect according to a special mode (in this example, a notification effect in a mode in which the first big prize opening LED 20c emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27) may be executed. According to such a configuration, the notification is performed by executing the notification effect in a special mode different from the normal mode based on the fact that a certain number of game media are won in a unit game in the first advantageous state, which is larger than a predetermined number. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by directing.

  Further, when a notification effect is executed in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on the probability variation big hit, a big hit based on the second advantageous state (in this example, a normal big hit (non-probability big hit)) When a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the (game state), the notification effect in the special mode may not be executed. Specifically, instead of the determination processing of S3921 and S3922 in the post-round processing, it is determined whether or not the normal big hit, and if it is determined that the normal big hit, the processing of S3923 and S3924 is not executed. Good. If comprised in that way, it can prevent that the entertainment interest of the game by alerting | reporting effect declines by not performing the alerting | reporting effect by a special aspect in a 2nd advantageous state.

  Further, when the notification effect is executed in the gaming machine configured to be controlled to the probability variation state based on the probability variation big hit, based on the fact that less than a specific number of game media have been won in one unit game in the advantageous state. Thus, a notification effect according to a normal mode (in this example, a notification effect in a mode in which the first big prize opening LED 20c and the second big prize opening LED 20d emit white light) can be executed. Then, when a specific number of game media wins in one unit game in the second advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state based on the normal big hit), the notification effect in the normal mode may be executed. Specifically, instead of the determination process of S3921 and S3922 in the post-round processing, it is determined whether or not it is a normal big hit, and if it is determined that it is a normal big hit, the process of S3925 may be executed. If comprised in that way, in the 2nd advantageous state, it replaces with the alerting effect by a special aspect, and the alerting effect by a normal aspect can be performed, and the effect effect of an alerting effect can be improved.

  In addition, when a notification effect is executed in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on the probability variation big hit, a predetermined game value is given when controlled to an advantageous state. (In this example, it is possible to execute a specific effect (in this example, a promotion effect executed in a manner similar to or similar to that shown in FIGS. . If a specific number of game media wins in one unit game in the first advantageous state before executing the specific effect (before the result notification in the promotion effect in this example), the notification effect in a special mode is executed. (In this example, instead of the notification effect in the special mode, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed), and after the specific effect is executed (in this example, after the result notification in the promotion effect), the first advantageous state When a specific number of game media are won in one unit game, a notification effect in a special mode may be executed. Specifically, instead of the determination process of S3921 in the post-round processing, it is determined whether the promotion effect is executed in the first round to the fifth round, and the promotion effect is executed in the first round to the second round. If it is determined that the number of rounds is five, S3923 and S3924 may not be executed (S3925 may be executed). If it is determined that the round is the sixth round or later, S3923 and S3924 may be executed. If comprised in that way, the effect of an alerting effect can be improved by performing the alerting effect by a special aspect after performing a specific effect.

  In the above embodiment, since it is determined that the game ball is actually controlled based on the fact that the game ball has won the specific area in the second grand prize opening, in the first to fifth rounds. Even if the promotion effect is executed and the winning result is notified, it is suggested that there is a high probability that it will be controlled to the probability variation state, but in this modification, whether or not the probability variation state is controlled by the big hit type. Since it is determined, if the winning result is notified in the promotion effect, it can be recognized that the state is controlled as it is.

  In the above-described modification, the first advantageous state with a high advantage is a big hit gaming state based on a probable big hit, and the second advantageous state with a low advantage is a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit (non-probable big hit). Although the case has been shown, it is not limited to such a mode.

  For example, in the case where a short-time big hit that is controlled only in the short-time state after a big hit game and a normal big hit that is controlled only in the normal state are provided, the first advantageous state is set to the big-hit gaming state based on the short-time big hit, and the second advantageous The state may be a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit. Further, for example, when the so-called look-ahead determination is performed during the big hit game, when there is a big hit in the hold memory (that is, when the big hit is a continuous big hit), the first advantageous state is set. The case where there is no such thing may be the second advantageous state.

  Further, for example, the first advantageous state may be a big hit with a large number of rounds (for example, a big hit of 15 rounds), and the second advantageous state may be a big hit with a small number of rounds (for example, a big hit of five rounds). In addition, for example, the first advantageous state is a big hit (a big hit where the probability changing state or the short-time state continues until the next big hit) and the second advantageous state is a big hit game. It is good also as a big hit in which the number of times of subsequent probability change and the number of short-time continuations are defined. Further, for example, the first advantageous state may be a big hit with a large number of probability change continuations and short-time continuation times after a big hit game, and the second advantageous state may be a big hit with a small number of probability change continuations after a big hit game and a small number of short-time continuations.

  As long as the first advantageous state having a high advantage and the second advantageous state having a low advantage are provided in some form as described above.

  Even in one case, there are cases where advantages or disadvantages can be distinguished from a plurality of viewpoints. For example, when there are 5R probability variable big hits and 10R normal big hits as big hit types, 10R normal big hits with a large number of rounds are more advantageous from the viewpoint of the number of rounds. For example, the 5R probability variable big hit, which is controlled to the probability change state after the big hit game, is more advantageous. In this case, priority may be given to the 10R normal big hit as the first advantageous state in view of the number of rounds, and the 5R probability variable big hit may be set as the second advantageous state. The probability variation big hit may be the first advantageous state, and the 10R normal big hit may be the second advantageous state.

  In the above embodiment, as a notification effect, a first notification that notifies the magnitude of the value acquired in a specific period (a prize ball number notification effect that notifies the number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during the big hit game) ) And the second notification that informs the magnitude of the value acquired during the special period (awarded ball number notification effect that notifies the number of award balls that were paid out as a winning ball during the big hit game during consecutive Chang) It is good. The priority level of the first notification may be higher than that of the second notification (when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed). In this way, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed. That is, a plurality of notification effects can be executed according to the priority order so as not to overlap, and a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in one open game (in this example, a big hit game), the number of game media (in this example, game balls) is more variable than the upper limit winning number (in this example, 10). Based on winning in the winning means (in this example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 (large winning opening)), it is possible to execute a notification effect (notification effect for over winning). Also, different sound output channels are used for the first winning number (11th) and the second winning number (12th), which is the next winning after the first winning number. The first notification effect is executed on the reproduction channel Ch0 in the eleventh (over winning first) and the second on the reproduction channel Ch1 in the twelfth (second over winning). The notification effect may be executed). In this way, the notification effect can be executed on different channels for the first winning number that is larger than the maximum number of winnings and the second winning number that is the next winning of the first winning number. The fall of the interest of the person can be prevented. In addition, the notification effect can be executed even when a winning greater than the upper limit winning number occurs at a short interval.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the third embodiment, a case where a plurality of types of big hit gaming states are set will be described. In the third embodiment, the types of jackpots are set to 15R probability variation jackpot, 15R fake probability variation jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot.

  The 15R probability variation jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a probability variation state after the end of the 15 round jackpot gaming state. The 15R presumed probable jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to the probable state after the end of the 15 round jackpot gaming state, and is a jackpot that is performed in the same manner as the 5R normal jackpot until the middle of the round. The 15R presumed probable jackpot is called a presumed probable jackpot because it is a jackpot that makes it appear as if it is a normal jackpot, with the same effect as the normal jackpot, even though it is a probable jackpot. . Further, the 5R probability variable big hit is a big hit that is controlled to the probability changed state after the end of the five round big hit gaming state. The 5R normal big hit is a big hit that is controlled to the normal state after the end of the five round big hit gaming state.

  In addition, as an effect during the big hit, in the 15R probability variable big hit, an effect indicating that it is a probability big hit and a big hit of 15R is executed during the big hit round. In addition, in the 15R fake probable big hit, an effect common to the 5R normal big hit is executed at the start of the round, so that an effect that makes it impossible to know whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit is executed. Further, in the 5R probability variable big hit, an effect common to the 5R normal big hit is executed at the start of the round, so that an effect that makes it impossible to know whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit is executed. The fact that 5R is a normal big hit or 15R masquerade probability change big hit can be notified by executing a round promotion effect and a probability change promotion effect, which will be described later, and is also notified by executing the notification effect. Further, whether or not the 5R normal big hit or the 5R probability big hit can be notified by executing a probability change promotion effect or a notification effect described later.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which a plurality of types of jackpots are set, the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control CPU 101) has a probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R probability variation jackpot, 15R appearance probability variation) on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The notification effect by the first notification image 213 and the like as shown in FIG. 12 is executed when the big hit and the 5R probability variation big hit are controlled, and the notification effect is not executed when the 5R normal big hit is controlled. The setting of various jackpot effects including such a notification effect will be described in detail with reference to the following flowchart.

  FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 are flowcharts showing the round process (S805) in the effect control process of the third embodiment. In the in-round processing, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the designation command reception flag after opening the big prize opening is set (S4920). Here, a flag such as a designated command reception flag after opening the big prize opening is set by the effect control CPU 101 when the received command is stored in the command reception buffer formed in the RAM 103, and the big hit game ends. Is erased at a predetermined timing.

  The effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S4921) when the designation command reception flag after the special winning opening is not set (N in S4920). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device (the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the frame LED 28, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n) (S4922). For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the effect during the round on the effect display device 9, the image data is read from the ROM 102 according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n), and the read image data is output to the VDP 109. At the same time, a control signal is output. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control various lamps to be turned on / off. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. By such processing, it is possible to vary the effects during the big hit game with various big hits (for example, 15R probability variable big hit, 5R normal big hit, etc.).

  In S4920, the effect control CPU 101 resets the designated command reception flag after opening the special winning opening if the designated command reception flag after opening the special winning opening is set (Y in S4920) (S4934). Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects an interval effect (effect that performs interval display according to the number of rounds), and selects process data according to the selected interval effect (S4935). Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts a process timer (S4936), sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (S806) (S4937), and ends the in-round processing.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the notification effect flag is set in S4923 (S4923). When the notification effect flag is set (Y in S4923), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S4944. On the other hand, when the notification effect flag is not set (N in S4923), the effect control CPU 101 receives a display result designation command man reception flag (a flag set when a command indicating various jackpot display results is received). ) To determine whether it is a 15R probability change (S4924). When it is 15R probability change (Y in S4924), the effect control CPU 101 sets a notification effect flag for executing the notification effect (S4925), and proceeds to the processing of S4944. On the other hand, if it is not the 15R probability change (N in S4924), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S4926.

  In step S4926, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a 15R appearance probability change. When it is 15R appearance probability change (Y in S4926), the effect control CPU 101 sets a probability change promotion effect flag for executing the probability change promotion effect (S4927), and further, a round for executing the round promotion effect. The promotion effect flag is set (S4928). Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a notification effect flag (S4925), and the process proceeds to S4944. On the other hand, if it is not the 15R appearance probability change (N in S4926), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S4929. Here, the probabilistic promotion effect is an effect that informs that the big hit that was considered to be a normal big hit is a probable big hit by the time the big hit game ends after the output symbol that is usually a big hit combination is derived and displayed. is there. In addition, the round promotion effect is a notification that a round will continue in a round that was supposed to end during a big hit game round (for example, when 5R is executed) (other rounds may be used). It is a production to do.

  In S4929, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the 5R probability change. When it is 5R probability change (Y in S4929), the effect control CPU 101 sets the probability change promotion effect flag (S4930), sets the notification effect flag (S4925), and proceeds to the processing of S4944. On the other hand, if it is not the 5R probability change (N in S4929), the effect control CPU 101 sets the probability change promotion failure effect flag (S4931), and proceeds to the process of S4944. The probability variation promotion effect is an effect in which the probability variation promotion effect is executed, but the probability variation promotion effect fails and it is normally notified that it is a big hit.

  In S4944, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the big prize opening prize flag is set. The grand prize winning flag is a flag set in S514 of FIG. 13, and is set every time a game ball is awarded to the big winning opening. The effect control CPU 101 resets the big prize opening prize flag (S4945) when the big prize opening prize flag is set (Y in S4944), and proceeds to the processing of S4948. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the over-winning flag is set (S4946) when the big winning opening winning flag is not set (N in S4944). The over-winning flag is a flag that is set in S516 of FIG. 13, and is a flag that is set when an over-winning to the big winning opening occurs.

  When the over-winning flag is set (Y in S4946), the effect control CPU 101 resets the over-winning flag (S4947), and proceeds to the processing of S4948. On the other hand, if the over-winning flag is not set (N in S4946), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to S4950 without performing S4948 and S4949.

  In S4948, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter, updates the acquired total number display (total acquired number display) (S4949), and proceeds to the process of S4950.

  In S4950, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the notification effect flag is set. When the notification effect flag is set (Y in S4950), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S4951. On the other hand, when the notification effect flag is not set (N in S4950), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S4953 without performing the processes of S4951 and S4952.

  In S4951, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the total number of game balls acquired exceeds a multiple of 500. When the total number of game balls acquired exceeds a multiple of 500 (Y in S4951), the effect control CPU 101 executes a notification effect (S4952), and proceeds to the process of S4953. On the other hand, when the total number of game balls acquired does not exceed a multiple of 500 (N in S4951), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S4953 without performing the process of S4952.

  Thus, when the notification effect flag is set, the notification effect is executed, but when the notification effect flag is not set, the notification effect is not executed. The notification effect flag is a flag that is set in 15R probability variation big hit, 15R fake probability variation big hit, and 5R probability variation big hit, and is not set in 5R normal big hit. Therefore, the player can know that the probability variation big hit which is more advantageous for the player than the normal big hit is performed by performing the notification effect. If it does in this way, the interest of the game in a big hit game can be improved by the production according to the kind of big hit game state. The notification effect may be executed when the 5R communication state is a big hit. In such a case, it is desirable to change the mode of the notification effect between the normal big hit and the probability variation big hit. In this way, a notification effect according to the first notification mode (for example, a notification effect with a probable big hit) is executed, or a notification effect according to the second notification mode (for example, a notification effect with a normal jackpot) is executed. Thus, the entertainment according to the type of the big hit game state can improve the interest of the game during the big hit game.

  In S4953, the CPU 101 for effect control executes the probability change promotion effect if the probability change promotion effect flag is set, and the probability change promotion failure effect flag is set if the probability change promotion effect flag is set. , Probability promotion failure production is executed. The probability change promotion effect is executed, for example, during five rounds, and when the probability change promotion effect is executed, it is indicated that the probability change big hit. In addition, when the probability change promotion failure production is executed, it is indicated that it is usually a big hit. Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes the round promotion effect at the round promotion effect timing (S4954), and proceeds to the process of S4955. The round promotion effect is executed during the fifth round, and when the round promotion effect is executed, it is notified that the round continues. Note that the probability variation promotion effect and the round promotion effect are both executed in five rounds, but may be executed in different rounds. Moreover, you may be made to alert | report alert change promotion and round promotion by one production | presentation. Further, an effect that the round promotion fails may be executed.

  In S4955, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the process timer has timed out. When the process timer has timed out (Y in S4955), the effect control CPU 101 starts the next process timer (S4956) and controls the effect device according to the contents of the next process data (S4957). The process during the round ends. On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out (N in S4955), the effect control CPU 101 ends the in-round processing without performing the processing of S4956 and S4957.

  The 5R normal big hit and the 5R probability variable big hit have the same opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in the big hit gaming state. In addition, it is possible to execute a probability variation promotion effect for notifying that the probability variation is a big hit during the 5R probability variation big hit. The notification effect is not executed during the 5R normal big hit, and the notification effect is executed during the 5R probability variable big hit. Therefore, when the notification effect is executed before the probability change promotion effect is executed, the probability change big hit is determined before the probability change promotion effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to distribute to the player in advance that the probable big hit is based on the notification effect. If it does in this way, the interest of the game in an advantageous state can be improved by the production according to the kind of big hit game state.

  Further, in the 15R presumed probable big hit, an effect that pretends to be a normal big hit is executed by an effect during the big hit common to the 5R normal big hit. In addition, a round promotion effect is executed for 15 fake probable big hits. In addition, the notification effect is not executed in the 5R normal big hit, and the notification effect is executed in the 15R apparent probability change big hit. In this way, when the round starts, it usually starts as if it was a big hit, and by actually performing a round promotion effect in the middle of the round, it was actually a big hit of 15R (15R presumed probable big hit) Can be notified. Therefore, when the notification effect is executed before the round promotion effect is executed, the player can be informed in advance that the round is promoted and that it is a probable big hit. If it does in this way, the interest of the game in an advantageous state can be improved by the production according to the kind of big hit game state. In addition, in the 15R presumed probable big hit, the round promotion effect may be executed at 5R and the probable change promotion effect may not be executed, or the round promotion effect and the probable change promotion effect may be executed simultaneously. Further, the round promotion effect and the probability change promotion effect may be executed in different numbers of rounds.

Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) Of the multiple types of big hits, a notification effect is executed if it is a probable big hit such as a 15R probable big hit, and a notification effect is not executed if it is a 5R normal big hit. If it does in this way, the interest of the game in the big hit game state can be improved by the production according to the big hit type.

  (2) Of the multiple types of big hits, the first notification effect may be executed if the probability change big hit such as 15R probability change big hit, and the second notification effect may be executed if it is a 5R normal big hit. In such a case, the form of the notification effect to be executed differs depending on whether the probability big hit or the normal big hit. If it does in this way, the interest of the game in the big hit game state can be improved by the production according to the big hit type.

  (3) As shown in the processing of S4950 to S4952 in FIG. 22, the notification effect is executed when the number of game balls given during the big hit game is a multiple of 500. In this way, since the notification effect is executed by acquiring 500 game balls, the entertainment effect of the game during the big hit game can be improved by diversifying the notification effect.

  (4) The 5R normal big hit is a big hit that is less advantageous to the player because it has less balls and does not enter a high probability state than the 15R probability variable big hit. Thus, the big hit is provided with a plurality of types of big hits having different advantages. If it does in this way, the interest of the game in the big hit game state can be improved by the type of the big hit.

  (5) The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot have the same opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in the jackpot gaming state. In addition, it is possible to execute a probability variation promotion effect for notifying that the probability variation is a big hit during the 5R probability variation big hit. The notification effect is not executed during the 5R normal big hit, and the notification effect is executed during the 5R probability variable big hit. If the notification effect is executed before the probability change promotion effect is executed, it is determined that the probability change big hit is executed before the probability change promotion effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to distribute to the player in advance that the probable big hit is based on the notification effect. If it does in this way, the interest of the game in an advantageous state can be improved by the production according to the kind of big hit game state.

  (6) In the 15R presumed probable big hit, the effect that pretends to be a normal big hit is executed by the effect during the big hit common to the 5R normal big hit. In addition, a round promotion effect is executed for 15 fake probable big hits. In addition, the notification effect is not executed in the 5R normal big hit, and the notification effect is executed in the 15R apparent probability change big hit. In this way, when the round starts, it usually starts as if it was a big hit, and by actually performing a round promotion effect in the middle of the round, it was actually a big hit of 15R (15R presumed probable big hit) Can be notified. Therefore, when the notification effect is executed before the round promotion effect is executed, the player can be informed in advance that the round is promoted and that it is a probable big hit. If it does in this way, the interest of the game in an advantageous state can be improved by the production according to the kind of big hit game state.

  (7) The 15R probable big hit and the 5R normal big hit have different effects during the big hit game. If it does in this way, the interest of the game in an advantageous state can be improved by the production according to the kind of big hit game state.

  (8) As shown in FIG. 12, when the mode is controlled to A mode, the first notification image 213 provides a notification effect by acquiring a game ball. In addition, when the mode is controlled to the B mode, the second notification image 214 performs a notification effect by acquiring a game ball. Therefore, the entertainment of the game during the big hit game (during the round) can be improved by the notification effect according to whether the effect state is the A mode or the B mode.

  (9) As shown in FIGS. 12B to 12D and S941 to S942 of FIG. 15, every time the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 500, the first notification image 213 in the A mode is used to select a game ball. The notification effect by having acquired is performed. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12E to 12G and S943 to S944 in FIG. 15, every time the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500, a game ball is acquired by the second notification image 214 in the B mode. The notification effect by having performed is performed. Therefore, by diversifying the notification effects, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round).

  (10) As shown in the acquired total number display image 224 in the A mode 224 and the acquired total number display image 225 in the B mode in FIG. 12, each time a game ball is awarded to the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, it is given A display in which game balls are incremented by 10 is performed. Therefore, since the number of assigned game balls can be variably displayed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round) by changing the display of the total number of acquisitions.

  (11) As shown in S923 to 927 in FIG. 12A and FIG. 14, a mode selection image 210 for selecting whether to set the A mode or the B mode during the round is displayed. Therefore, since it becomes possible to select the production state during the round, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round).

  (12) In the process of S930 to S932 in FIG. 14, after the process of adding the winning ball in the over winning is executed, the acquired total number display image 224 in the A mode and the acquired total number display image 225 in the B mode are the game balls. A variable display of the total number of winnings that is incremented by 10 every time a prize is won in the big winning opening is performed. In this way, the notification effect is executed after adding the number of game balls awarded by winning 11 or 12 more than 10 game balls in one unit game. An appropriate notification effect can be executed.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, the probability variation big hits are described as the first advantageous state and the normal big hits as the second advantageous state as the advantageous states having different advantages. The second advantageous state has a relationship that the advantage is lower than that of the first advantageous state. However, if the relationship is such, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state may be as follows. For example, the relationship may be such that the second advantageous state is less advantageous because the number of round executions is less than the first advantageous state. In addition, when the second advantageous state is a small hit with a small number of balls that can be acquired without changing the game state before and after the hit, the first advantageous state is a big hit with a large amount of probable big hits or winnings. May be.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, when the execution timing of the notification effect and the probability variation promotion effect overlap, execution of either one of the effects may be prohibited. For example, when the execution timing of the probability change promotion effect and the execution timing of the notification effect overlap, the notification effect is not executed, so that the probability change promotion is not determined before the probability change promotion effect is executed. be able to. In such a case, the notification effect may be executed at a timing after the execution of the probability change promotion effect. The same processing may also be executed when the execution timing of the notification effect and the round promotion effect overlap.

  (3) In the various effects shown in the above-described embodiment, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and a stop button by the player When the symbols on the display means are stopped according to the operation of the display means, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, it may be applied to a slot machine (slot machine) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. Is possible. In the slot machine, a bonus such as a big bonus (BB), a regular bonus (RB), an AT for performing an effect for notifying an internal lottery result, an RT in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is different from the normal gaming state, The notification effect as described above may be executed when the ART is controlled to be shifted to the AT and the RT. The notification effect is executed in the first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player among the plurality of advantageous states, but the notification effect is not executed in the second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. May be. Further, among the plurality of types of advantageous states, the notification effect according to the first notification mode is executed in the first advantageous state advantageous to the player, but the first advantageous state is disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. You may perform the alerting effect by the 2nd alerting | reporting aspect different from an alerting | reporting aspect. Here, for example, the first advantageous state may be a big bonus (BB) with a large number of acquired medals, and the second advantageous state may be a regular bonus (RB) with a small number of acquired medals. Further, the notification effect described above may be executed when a plurality of advantageous states are provided in other advantageous states.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the notification mode of the notification effect may be varied depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the notification effect mode is a plurality of notification modes, and the notification effect with white characters and the notification effect with rainbow characters are executed. Then, during the big hit game, based on the fact that there is a reserved memory that is a jackpot display result in the reserved memory buffer, a notification effect that is normally executed with white characters may be executed with rainbow colored characters. In this way, the notification mode of the notification effect can be determined based on the fact that the variable display that is the jackpot display result is stored in the holding storage buffer, and the interest of the game during the jackpot game can be improved. it can. In addition, when the variable display which becomes a jackpot display result is memorize | stored in the holding | maintenance storage buffer, you may make it perform alerting | reporting production | presentation in the ratio of 100%, and a predetermined lottery ratio (for example, The notification effect may be executed with rainbow characters at a ratio of 50%. Further, in such a case, there is a possibility that the notification effect may be executed a plurality of times in one big hit, and each time a lottery for determining whether or not to make a rainbow character may be executed. . Moreover, if the notification effect by the rainbow character is executed at a time, the subsequent notification effect may be executed by the rainbow character.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, during the big hit game, the promotion effect from the normal big hit to the probable big hit may be executed. In such a case, when the notification effect is executed in the round in which the promotion effect is executed, the notification effect may be different from the normal mode.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, a plurality of types of jackpots may be provided. And you may make it the aspect of an alerting | reporting effect differ with kinds of jackpots. For example, 4R big hits, 8R big hits, and 15 round big hits may be provided as types of big hits, and the notification mode of the notification effect may be different depending on the type of each big hit.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, an upper limit value may be provided for the display of the total acquisition number display. And when a game ball is acquired to the said upper limit, you may make it stop the update of acquisition total number display. For example, in the case where 100,000 is set as the upper limit value and the total number of acquired game balls exceeds 100,000, the acquired total number display image 224 in the A mode and the total acquired number display image 225 in the B mode are displayed. The update of the display image may be stopped. In this way, it can be notified by stopping the update that the player has acquired a large amount of game balls, and a sense of superiority can be given to the player. When the upper limit value is reached, the acquired total number display may be changed to a mode different from the normal display mode.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, it may be changed according to the total number of game balls that have acquired the notification effect mode. For example, in the case where the B mode is selected, when the total number of acquired game balls is 2500, the second notification image 214 is displayed as a white character image, and the total number of acquired game balls is 5000. The second notification image 214 may be displayed as a red character image, and when the total number of acquired game balls reaches 10,000, the second notification image 214 may be displayed as a rainbow character image. In this way, the notification mode changes according to the total number of acquisitions, and the interest of the game during the big hit game can be improved. In the A mode, the notification mode may be different depending on the total number of acquired game balls. In such a case, the notification mode may be different only when the number is a good number such as 2500, 5000, or 10,000, or the notification mode may be different every 500 pieces. .

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the notification effect may be different when the total number of game balls acquired exceeds a predetermined value. For example, when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value, the notification effect may not be executed, or a different concept may be displayed. More specifically, the notification image may not be displayed after the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value. In addition, after the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value, a congratulations display such as “Congratulations!” Is displayed as a concept (such as a display that celebrates the achievement of the predetermined value). A notification effect by a display that changes to characters may be executed.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the display image is different as an aspect of the notification effect (depending on the A mode or the B mode) depending on the effect state. Such display images may have different character colors, different character fonts, or different character appearances. For example, the appearance of characters may be different depending on whether the appearance direction of characters (numbers) comes out from the left of the display screen of the effect display device 9 or comes out from the right.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, the image when the notification effect is executed may be configured from different materials. For example, when the A mode is selected, the first notification image 213 and the girl image 221 may be made of different materials. In this way, images to be displayed can be set separately. As a display method, for example, a combination of images may be determined by lottery. In such a case, a restriction may be applied so that the same predetermined image is not continuously displayed.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, during the selection of the mode as shown in FIG. 12A, the notification effect may not be executed even if the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value. In such a case, the fact that the notification effect is executed is stored in the storage area of the RAM 103 so that after the mode selection is completed, it is notified that the total number of acquired game balls has exceeded a predetermined value. Also good. Further, when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value during the mode selection, the notification effect may not be executed.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the A mode and the B mode can be selected in the first round is shown. However, during the big hit game, the A mode and the B mode may always be selected. In that case, in the second and subsequent rounds, the selection display can be selected as an area at the end of the display screen so that it does not interfere with the effect during the round by occupying a large area of the display screen of the effect display device 9. A certain thing may be displayed small.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the A mode and the B mode can be selected in the first round is shown. However, the player may not be able to select a mode when the special condition is satisfied. For example, in a case where a certain story is continuously displayed during each round of big hits, a special condition is established that the ending of the story is displayed based on the fact that the big hits are repeated 20 times. In this case, the mode may not be selected during the 20th big hit when the ending is displayed. Also, during the 20th big hit when the ending is displayed, the notification effect may not be executed, or a small window image for the notification effect is displayed in a region different from the region where the ending is displayed. A notification effect may be executed. In addition, the mode of notification effect may be different between a big hit that the player can select and a big hit that cannot be selected by the player (a big hit under special conditions).

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, whether or not the notification effect is performed may be determined depending on whether the player is a big hit that is advantageous or unfavorable for the player. For example, the notification effect may be executed in the case of a promising big hit that is advantageous to the player, and the notification effect may not be executed in the case of a normal big hit that is disadvantageous to the player.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, the game ball counted for the notification effect has been described as being paid out for the winning of the game ball. However, the number of difference balls obtained by subtracting the game balls that have been shot into the game area 7 and taken into the out port 26 from the game balls to be paid out may be used as the game balls counted for the notification effect. In order to do so, for example, a launch sensor may be provided at the launch position of the hit ball, and an out-port sensor capable of counting game balls taken into the out-port 26 may be provided. Then, it is only necessary to be able to count the number of difference balls by monitoring each winning sensor, launch sensor, and out port sensor including the big winning opening.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, in a gaming system configured to include the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a management server connected to the Internet network, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the management server are connected to the two-dimensional code reading function and the Internet network. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player's past game history and the effects selected by the player are selected by the player who owns the mobile terminal (for example, a mobile phone). You may enable it to perform the game mode (mobile interlocking | linkage mode) in which a game can be performed in the game mode reflecting the mode (mode in which the character which appears is different). In such a case, the mode of the notification effect during the big hit may be different depending on whether or not the mobile link mode is being executed. Moreover, the mode of the notification effect during the big hit may be different depending on the type of mode selected by the player.

  (18) In the embodiment described above, the mode of the notification effect during the big hit may be made different by notification of different lotteries. Notification of different lottery means, for example, in a promotion effect that informs that a big hit will be a promising big hit during a big hit, a full announcement mode that announces the presence or absence of a probable change by a single announcement and a multiple change announcement It is like a notification by a chance notification mode for notifying the presence or absence of the event. Such a difference in notification may be regarded as a difference in effect state, and the notification effect during a big hit may be different in the complete notification mode and the chance notification mode.

  (19) In the embodiment described above, the mode of the notification effect during the big hit may be different due to the difference in the music flowing during the big hit. For example, you may make it the aspect of alerting | reporting effect differ by the case where the music of A is flowing and the music of B is flowing.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, the effect state (effect mode) may be changeable in a game state other than the big hit game. For example, the state of the notification effect during the next jackpot game may be changed by changing the effect state during the short time state after the end of the jackpot game state.

  (21) In the various effects shown in the above-described embodiment, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and a stop button by the player When the symbols on the display means are stopped according to the operation of the display means, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, it may be applied to a slot machine (slot machine) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. Is possible. In the slot machine, a bonus such as a big bonus (BB), a regular bonus (RB), an AT for performing an effect for notifying an internal lottery result, an RT in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is different from the normal gaming state, The notification effect as described above may be executed when the ART is controlled to be shifted to the AT and the RT. For example, when controlled by the AT, one of the modes of the production state can be selected, and when the first production state is controlled, the notification production by the first notification mode is executed and the second production is performed. When the state is controlled, a notification effect in the second notification mode may be executed.

  (22) In the above-described embodiment, the big hit gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a short time state, and a high base state.

  (23) In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27R, 27L, etc.) are mounted. Alternatively, two substrates, the second effect control substrate, may be provided.

  (24) In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the microcomputer for effect control of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, etc., one change is made when the change is started. Although an example in which a pattern command is transmitted has been shown, a variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer using two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to determine whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slide effect, etc. (2) Before the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode is transmitted, and the second command is a so-called second in the case where the reach is reached, such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a redrawing effect. You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after a stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in variable display based on the variation time derived from the combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer, the change time is notified by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control microcomputer. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced. In the configuration in which the change pattern is notified to the effect control microcomputer by two commands in this way, the determination result of the display result by the effect process at the time of winning in the second command after transmitting the first command, Alternatively, the prefetch determination information such as the variation pattern type may be transmitted, and the prefetch notice effect may be executed based on the reception of the second command. Here, the pseudo-ream is a pseudo display that is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for continuous variation. Further, the slip refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol stops in the variable display.

  (25) As the present embodiment, a gaming machine that pays out game media to a player's hand in response to the occurrence of a win has been described. Enclosed game machines that add game points (scores) without paying out may be adopted. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which are examples of game media, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball launching operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning.

  (26) In the embodiment described above, for example, a case has been described in which a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. It cannot be caught. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  (27) In the above-described embodiment, a specific value exceeding 0% has been described as a “ratio (ratio, probability)” as a specific example. However, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence ratio of a predetermined game state 1 in a predetermined game period is compared with the occurrence ratio of another game state 2, and “one occurrence ratio is higher than the other occurrence ratio” This includes the case where the percentage of occurrence of one game state is 0%.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, after the display result of the variable display when the display result of the variable display is determined to be the probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation state is unconditionally. An example of the probability variation state control to be controlled is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation determination device that is controlled to the probability variation state when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 20. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the fourth embodiment, part or all of the contents already described in the first to third embodiments will be described again (described in the same or different expressions as in the first to third embodiments). ), When a description of a part or all of the contents already described in the first embodiment to the third embodiment is omitted, or a part of the contents omitted in the first embodiment to the third embodiment. Or the whole may be explained. In the first to third embodiments and the fourth embodiment, different names or the like may be used for the same or similar objects. As an example, the “variation type command (C3XX)” in the first embodiment or the like is referred to as “variation category command (C6XX)” in the fourth embodiment (see FIGS. 7 and 37). In the fourth embodiment, the “I / O port unit 105” in FIG. 4 is disassembled into “input port 105B”, “output port 105C”, and the like (see FIGS. 3 and 26). In the first to third embodiments and the fourth embodiment, numerical values related to the same or similar processing may be different. As an example, the range of random 1 in the first to third embodiments is in the range of 0 to 9 (see FIG. 4), but in the fourth embodiment is in the range of 0 to 39 seconds (see FIG. 30). .

  FIG. 23 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment as viewed from the front. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray (lower plate) 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball are provided. . A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). Is attached to the stick controller 122 that can be tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operation, for example, by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 26) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 121 (see FIG. 26) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like on the trigger button 125 is provided inside an operation rod of the stick controller 122. 26). In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 26) that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower plate main body and the like below the stick controller 122. Further, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 26) for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by a player pressing a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 26) for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 23, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 as the position approached to either right or left in the upper plate and the lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not in the vertical relationship, but may be in the horizontal relationship, for example.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the effect control microcomputer is executing variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a (first variable display unit), the effect display device 9 displays the effect along with the variable display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b, the effect display device 9 executes the effect display along with the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variable display state is ended. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying the fourth symbol. In the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with variable display of the first special symbol, which will be described later, and the second special symbol. There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the production symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variable display of the production symbol is performed on the side of the production control microcomputer 100). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, an effect that the effect content including the variable display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects, for example, and effects such that the moving object shields all or part of the screen are performed. For this reason, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 9, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not it is currently in a variable display state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, whether or not the current state of the variable display is being performed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Can be reliably recognized. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation, and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same.

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit, and when the big hit symbol is stopped on the second special symbol display 8b, the fourth symbol display area for the second special symbol is displayed. A display color reminiscent of a big hit at 9d (a display color different from an outlier. For example, it is displayed in blue when out of place, but red in a big hit.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, separately from the effect display device 9, a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used. You may make it implement | achieve a 4th symbol display area. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, there is provided a first special symbol display 8a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 8a is realized by a simple and small display device (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In the present embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  In the variable display of the first special symbol, the first start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (in the present embodiment, the technical ball passes through the first start winning opening 13 (first start opening) (including winning). After the variable display start condition (for example, the first reserved memory number is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and The game is started based on the fact that the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol satisfies the second start condition that is the execution condition of the variable display (in this embodiment, the game ball is in the second start winning opening 14 (second start opening) or the second start winning prize. After passing through the mouth (second starting port) 17 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the second reserved memory number is not 0, the first special symbol and the second special symbol) The display starts when the variable display of the symbol is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) Is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 9, there is provided a distribution device 200 for distributing the inflowing game balls. Further, below the effect display device 9, a first start winning opening 13 and a second starting winning opening 14 are provided so as to be arranged side by side. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a. In addition, the game ball won in the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a.

  Further, below the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, a variable winning ball apparatus 15 having a second start winning opening 17 through which a game ball can be won is provided. The game ball won in the second start winning opening 17 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 17a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won at the second start winning port 17 (it is easier to start and win), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 17. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning port 13 and the second start winning ports 14, 17 may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display composed of four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning ports 14, 17 or the second hold memory number. 18b is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is provided a total pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number (total number of pending pending storage) that is the sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count. ing. As described above, in the present embodiment, the total pending storage display unit 18c that displays the total number is provided, thereby making it easy to grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the variable display start condition. be able to. In the present embodiment, the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory are displayed side by side in the order of winning in the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning ports 14 and 17 in the combined hold storage display unit 18c. It is displayed in a manner capable of recognizing whether it is the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the display corresponding to the first reserved memory (hereinafter also referred to as the first reserved memory display) is a red circle. The display may be displayed and the display corresponding to the second reserved memory (hereinafter also referred to as the second reserved memory display) may be displayed as a blue round display). In addition, it replaces with the total pending | holding memory | storage display part 18c, and it may comprise so that the 1st pending | holding memory display part which displays the 1st pending | holding memory number and the 2nd pending memory display part which displays the 2nd pending memory number may be provided. Good.

  As a display mode of the hold display displayed in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the display color is “white” (first mode), the display color is “blue”, and the display color is red. “Red” (second mode) and “character” (specific mode) on which a character is drawn are provided. The reliability for the big hit is “white” <“blue” <“red” <“character”. In addition, as will be described in detail later, the “character” hold display can be displayed only when it corresponds to the hold memory that is a probable big hit, that is, when the display mode changes to “character” The player is informed that a probable big hit will be made.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the hold display for the hold storage that has not yet been changed is performed, and the variable display with respect to the hold storage is started and ended. The hold display for the hold storage is continuously displayed on the active display unit 18d different from the combined hold storage display unit 18c. That is, the active display unit 18d displays an active display (variable display corresponding image) corresponding to the variable display being executed. The active display is an image showing the reliability with respect to the occurrence of a big hit based on the fluctuation during execution. As the display mode of the active display, the same display mode (“white”, “blue”, “red”, “character”) as the above-described hold display is used. In addition, as long as it can be recognized that the display corresponds to the variable display currently being executed, the display need not be the same as the hold display, and other figures, characters, and the like may be displayed. .

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the left side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In the present embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be won at the second start winning port 17). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a display result of variable symbol special display is increased compared to the normal state. In the state (except for the high probability / low base state described later), the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased. Enhanced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23, a special variable winning ball apparatus 20 that forms a large winning opening is provided below the second start winning opening 17. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball (out ball) that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail (not shown) formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second start winning ports 14 and 17 and is detected by the second start port switches 14a and 17a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is displayed). And the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. Is done. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning holes 14 and 17. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  Next, the distribution device 200 will be described. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sorting apparatus 200. As shown in FIG. 24, an inflow port 201 into which a game ball can flow is provided at the top of the sorting apparatus 200. In addition, a sorting member 202 is provided inside the sorting device 200 for sorting the game balls that have flowed into the sorting device 200 from the inlet 201 into either the left passage 203 or the right passage 204. Further, at the lower part of the sorting device 200, a left outlet 205 from which the game ball that has passed through the left passage 203 can flow out of the sorting device 200, and a game ball that has passed through the right passage 204 can flow out of the sorting device 200. And a right outlet 206 is provided.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24A, a state in which the right passage 204 in the sorting apparatus 200 is shielded by the sorting member 202 and a game ball can pass through the left passage 203 is shown. When a game ball flows into the distribution device 200 from the inlet 201 in the state shown in FIG. 24A, the game ball that flows in from the inlet 201 is left by the distribution member 202 as shown in FIG. It is distributed to the passage 203, passes through the left passage 203, and flows out from the left outlet 205. Since the first start winning opening 13 is positioned below the left outlet 205, the game ball that has flowed out of the left outlet 205 wins the first start winning opening 13.

  Further, when the game ball passes through the left passage 203, the game ball hits the blade portion 202a provided in the rotation shaft portion of the sorting member 202, and the blade portion 202a is pushed by the weight of the game ball, As shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the sorting member 202 changes from a state where it is tilted to the right side to a state where it is tilted to the left side. With such a change, as shown in FIG. 24B, the left passage 203 in the sorting apparatus 200 is shielded by the sorting member 202, and the game ball can pass through the right passage 204.

  Next, in such a state, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), when the game ball flows into the sorting device 200 from the inflow port 201, it flows from the inflow port 201 as shown in FIG. 24 (d). The game balls are distributed to the right passage 204 by the distribution member 202, pass through the right passage 204, and flow out from the right outlet 206. Since the second start winning opening 14 is located below the right outlet 206, the game ball that has flowed out of the right outlet 206 wins the second start winning opening 14.

  Further, when the game ball passes the right passage 204, the game ball hits the blade portion 202a provided in the rotation shaft portion of the sorting member 202, and the blade portion 202a is pushed by the weight of the game ball, As shown in FIGS. 24C and 24D, the sorting member 202 changes from a state where it is tilted to the left side to a state where it is tilted to the right side. By changing in such a manner, as shown in FIG. 24 (d), the right passage 204 in the sorting apparatus 200 is shielded by the sorting member 202, and the game ball can pass through the left passage 203.

  By performing the operation shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, the game balls that have flowed into the sorting device 200 by the sorting member 202 are alternately distributed to the left passage 203 and the right passage 204, and the first start winning prize is obtained. It is possible to win alternately at the mouth 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Note that, for example, the first start winning port 13 → the first start winning port 13 → the first start winning port 13 is not limited to the case where the first start winning port 13 and the second start winning port 14 can be alternately awarded by the distribution device 200. 1 start winning port 13 → second starting winning port 14 → first starting winning port 13 → first starting winning port 13 → first starting winning port 13 → second starting winning port 14... In other words, it may be possible to make a winning in accordance with a certain order, such as one that repeats the operation of winning one in the second start winning opening 14 when three are awarded in the first starting winning opening 13.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the first start winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14 are provided below the distribution device 200, so that they are distributed to the left passage 203. The case where the game ball is won at the first start winning opening 13 at about 100% and the game ball distributed to the right passage 204 is won at the second start winning opening 14 at about 100% is shown. The game balls distributed to the right passage 204 and the right passage 204 may spill out of the sorting apparatus 200, and even if the game balls are distributed to the left passage 203 and the right passage 204, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start are not necessarily required. There may be a case where the winning opening 14 is not won. For example, in FIG. 24, the game ball is configured to fall directly below the left outlet 205 and the right outlet 206, but a bottom member is provided at the left outlet 205 and the right outlet 206 to be viewed from the player. It is configured so that the game ball flows to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 after being guided to the back side, and an opening is provided on the outer side surface of the left passage 203 and the right passage 204, and left A part of the game balls distributed to the passage 203 and the right passage 204 may spill out of the distribution device 200 from the opening and may not win the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. It may be configured.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first start winning port 13 and the second start winning port 14 are provided outside the distribution device 200 (specifically, as shown in FIG. Although the case where the first start winning award port 13 and the second starting winning award port 14 are included in the sorting apparatus 200 is shown.

  Moreover, although the case where the two paths 203 and 204 were provided in the distribution apparatus 200 was shown in this embodiment, not only when it is two but three or more paths may be provided. In this case, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of paths that can be awarded exist in either one or both of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14.

  In the present embodiment, the distribution member 202 of the distribution apparatus 200 is physically switched to the left and right by the weight of the game ball. For example, a solenoid or a motor for driving the distribution member 202 is provided. The sorting member 202 may be alternately switched under the control of the game control microcomputer 560.

  FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 25 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. A random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  An input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switches 14a and 17a, the gate switch 32a and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. ing. The main board 31 also has an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 forming the big winning opening and the solenoid 16 for opening / closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15 in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, and a second special symbol hold storage display that variably display special symbols. 18b, display control of the normal symbol display 10 and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs information output signals such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect symbol is performed.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35 and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output.

  As will be described later, the effect control means is also connected to a trigger sensor 121 provided in the stick controller 122, a tilt direction sensor unit 123, a vibrator motor 126, and a push sensor 124 provided in the push button 120. However, the illustration is omitted in FIG.

  FIG. 26 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 26, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 105A and the input port 105B. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In the present embodiment, a VDP 109 that controls display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100 and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 105A on the effect control board 80. The input driver 105A passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal direction does not pass in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 26 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 121 via the input port 105E. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 105E. In addition, the production control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 105F. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105D, thereby causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105D. In addition, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via 105C.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies current to the light emitter (in this example, the frame LED 28) based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time-series manner in a predetermined period (for example, a changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (such as CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM can be accessed. (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (usually big hit, probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit, small hit or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 36). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may resume the variable display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In the present embodiment, the value of a variable time timer, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the saved variable time timer value is resumed, and the variable symbol special display is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, the value of a special symbol process flag, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs at the time of the power failure. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In the present embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit type determination random number) to 0, but it is set to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit type determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, initial values are set in flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, and a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In the present embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16), and when the display random number update process is completed, the interrupt permitted state is set (step S19). In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is not a big hit or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit. The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number.

  In the present embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed (however, in the case of the sudden probability variation big hit, the reach probability sudden hit symbol (for example, “135”) is not reached but reached. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switches 14a and 17a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs display control processing for performing display control of the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b. Execute (Step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit type determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switches 14a and 17a, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switches 14a, 17a and the count switch 23 being turned on. The payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. Is output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed in the main process. It may be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effect symbols that do not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in the case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed together (however, in the case of sudden probability big hit, what is reach? (In some cases, suddenly a probable big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8 a or the second special symbol display 8 b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same way as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, “135”) may be stopped and displayed. The display effect on the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short. It is a big hit, and it is a big hit that shifts the gaming state after the big hit game to a probable change state (that is, it makes it appear as if the player suddenly became a probable change state by doing so. is there). In other words, in the present embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big winning opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 29, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 and super PB3-1 to super PB3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 29, about the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 which is used when not reaching and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, re-variation is performed three times when using the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 among the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-continuous. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 29, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2− as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. 3 Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 It is prepared. In FIG. 29, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns that are used when sudden probability big hit or small hit. Also, as shown in FIG. 29, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-change is performed three times. In addition, regarding the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of Super Reach A with a pseudo-ream, the variation time is 32. In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even when the same type of super reach is involved, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. In addition, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variation time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When performing variable display of 2 special symbols, the variation time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (ordinary jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination) (2) Random 2 (MR2): type of variation pattern (class) (For variation pattern type determination) (3) Random 3 (MR3): Determine variation pattern (variation time) (For variation pattern determination) (4) Random 4 (MR4): Generate a hit based on a normal symbol (5) Random 5 (MR5): Random 4 initial value is determined (Random 4 initial value determination)

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined by using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then determined by using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). The variation pattern included in the type is determined. As described above, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B are included. It may be divided into variation pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect. The variation pattern type may be called a variation type or a variation category.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a normal big hit or a probabilistic big hit, a normal CA3-1 that is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with only normal reach, and a fluctuation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity. Are classified into a normal CA 3-2 that is a variation pattern type including the super CA 3-3 and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type with super reach. In addition, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern with a specific effect without a reach. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation without reach and specific effects, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a pseudo reach of normal reach and two re-variations, and normal CA2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a pseudo sequence of normal reach and one re-variation -6 and super CA2-7 which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 28, the game control microcomputer 560 counts up (adds 1) a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number in (1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In the present embodiment, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 31A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal big hit determination table used in a normal state and a short time state (that is, a gaming state that is not a probable change state) and a probable change big hit determination table used in a probable change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 31A is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 31A is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 31A is a jackpot determination value.

  FIGS. 31B and 31C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when variable display of the first special symbol and a small hit determination table used when variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 31B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. In addition, the numerical values described in FIGS. 31B and 31C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it is possible to determine the small hit only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and not to provide the small hit when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state. Even if the game state is transitioned to the probable state, a small hit is generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not it will be probable, the current game state is in the probable state. On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if the second special symbol is variably displayed so that a small hit does not occur, if the gaming state is a probability change state, the small hit is less likely to occur, and the squeezing effect for the probability change is not performed more than necessary. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (a normal big hit, a probability variation big hit, and a sudden probability variation big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 31B and 31C, it is decided to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 31A indicates the probability (ratio) of being a big hit. Further, the “probability” shown in FIGS. 31B and 31C indicates the probability (ratio) of making a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 31B and 31C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first special winning symbol 13 is started and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the second special symbol is given by starting the second special winning symbol 14 and 17. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “small hit” is high.

  FIGS. 31D and 31E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Of these, FIG. 31D determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. Further, FIG. 31 (E) determines the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the game ball winning in the second start winning ports 14 and 17 (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b when doing.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on a random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type is determined as “normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit”. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 31D and 31E, five determination values are assigned to the “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). On the other hand, in the jackpot type determination table 131b, one determination value is assigned to “sudden probability change big hit” (at a ratio of 1/40). (Suddenly a probable big hit) Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first special winning symbol 13 is started and a variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the second special symbol is given by starting the second special winning symbol 14, 17. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “suddenly probable big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “suddenly probable big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie, Only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, it may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may occur.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 31D and 31E, a sudden probability variation big hit as a first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of game value is given, and a game of a larger amount than the game value. As the second specific gaming state to which value is given, there are cases where it is determined to be a normal big hit or a probable big hit of 15 rounds, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first specific gaming state is at a high rate. Although the case where it decides to do is shown, the game value given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specific gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and it is possible to execute an effect in such a manner as to inquire whether or not the jackpot continues further. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 31D and 31E, the types of big hits include “normal big hit”, “probability big hit”, and “sudden probability big hit”. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is the one shown in this embodiment. Not limited to. For example, a 10R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 10 round jackpot game, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 7 round jackpot game, and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 5 round jackpot game may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where there are three types of big hit types, “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” and “suddenly probable big hit” is shown, but not limited to three types, for example, four or more big hit types A type may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “ordinary big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the 15-round big hit gaming state and is shifted to the short-time state only after the big hit gaming state ends (see step S167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time reduction state, when the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times), the time reduction state ends (see steps S168 and S137 to S140). Even before the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is also finished when the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state and then shifts to the probable state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, it is shifted to the probable state and also to the short time state). (See steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, until the next big hit occurs, the probability variation state and the time reduction state continue (see step S132).

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to “normal big hit” and “probable big hit” (in this embodiment, 0.1 second is opened twice). It is a big hit. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In addition, in “normal big hit” and “probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in “sudden probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long. It is extremely short, 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a big winning opening during a big hit game. In this embodiment, after the sudden probability variation big hit gaming state is finished, the state is shifted to the probability variation state (in this embodiment, the state is shifted to the probability variation state and also to the short time state. See steps S169 and S170 described later. ). Then, until the next big hit occurs, the probability variation state and the time reduction state continue (see step S132).

  Note that the mode of sudden probability change big hit is not limited to that shown in the present embodiment. For example, the number of times of opening of the big prize opening may be 15 times (15 rounds), which is the same as the normal big hit or suddenly probable big hit, and only the opening time of the big prize opening may be made extremely short as 0.1 seconds.

  In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, even when “small hit” is reached, the big prize opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each time, similarly to the big hit gaming state by “suddenly probable big hit” Is controlled. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when it is configured so that all the big hit types are probable big hits, it is not necessary to provide the small hits. In addition, when all big hit types are probabilistic big hits, if a small hit is provided, a sudden probable big hit that does not involve a short-time state is provided only by shifting to a probable state (high probability state). It is preferable that the opening pattern of the big winning opening is the same in the case of the sudden probability change big hit and the small win.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random value of 1, and correspond to the “ordinary big hit”, “probable change big hit”, and “suddenly probable big hit” (big hit type determination value). ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as the type corresponding to the matching jackpot type determination value.

  32A to 32C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random value (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 32A used when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, and FIG. 32B used when the big hit type is “probable big hit”. The allocation pattern of the determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Accordingly, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  As shown in FIGS. 32A and 32B, in this embodiment, when “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” is set, the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is If it is 150-251, it turns out that the variable display with a super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is performed at least.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for normal big hit and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream, super reach and pseudo ream A variation pattern type that is not accompanied is assigned.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type judgment table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit” A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, the sudden hit is likely to be changed to the big hit state by the normal big hit or the probable big hit. The variation pattern type can be determined.

  FIG. 32D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown.

  FIGS. 33A to 33C are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. Of these, FIG. 33 (A) shows a variation pattern type determination table 135A for loss used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 5. FIG. 33B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 5 or more. FIG. 33 (C) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135 </ b> C used when the gaming state is a probability change state or a time-short state. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a loss symbol. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  Note that the example shown in FIG. 33 shows a case where separate variation pattern type determination tables 135B to 135C are used for a case where the gaming state is a probability change state or a short time state and a case where the total pending storage number is 5 or more. However, the common variation pattern type determination table may be used for the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state and the case where the total pending storage number is 5 or more. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 33C shows a case in which the common variation / time-shortening variation pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of pending storages. As the variation pattern type determination table, a plurality of loss variation pattern determination tables (tables having different ratios of determination values) corresponding to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type determination table for losing 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 5 and the total pending storage number is 5 or more. In this example, two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B. However, the method of dividing the variation pattern type determination table for deviation is not limited to that shown in the present embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2). For example, the deviation variation pattern type determination table may be used separately for each of the three, the total pending storage number, the four total pending storage number,... Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  In the present embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storage, but a variation pattern type for deviation according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of determination tables may be provided. For example, when variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a variation pattern type determination table for detachment prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory). Fluctuation variation pattern type determination for 0 number, 1 first reserved memory number, 1st reserved memory number 2 pieces, 1st reserved memory number 3 pieces, 1st reserved memory number 4 pieces, etc. Each table may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 5 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that the “specific performance mode” is a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation for at least big hits, such as a fluctuation pattern with super reach, and that can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, “expectation degree (reliability)” for the big hit indicates an appearance rate (probability) that a big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific performance mode is executed. ing. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when jackpot is determined) / (when jackpot is determined and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (A) and 33 (B), in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is If it is 230-251, it turns out that the variable display accompanied by at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is performed irrespective of the total number of reserved storage.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is If it is 1 to 79, it can be seen that variable display of normal fluctuations is executed at least with no reach (with no specific effects such as pseudo-ream and slip effects) regardless of the total number of pending storages. With such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) is at least one of variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) The determination values (1 to 79 in the example shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means that, as shown in the present embodiment, for example, the reachable display result is not accompanied by a reach, without a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slide effect. It is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) used when a big hit is not made.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, a case where a common jackpot variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown. Depending on whether there is a normal state or not, a big hit variation pattern type determination table prepared separately may be used. In the present embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 5 or more, the variation pattern of shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 33B. In this case, the total number of pending storages (the first number of pending storages or the number of second pending storages may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state is shown. The threshold value may be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3, (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example) A variation pattern for shortening variation may be determined by selecting a variation pattern type determination table for loss, and when the gaming state is a probability variation state or a short time state, the total number of pending storages is smaller 1 or 2 (Or, for example, even when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is smaller 0 or 1), the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening is selected and the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation is set. It may be determined.

  34A and 34B are explanatory views showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 34A, the variation pattern type includes a normal CA3-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern with normal reach and a pseudo-ream. A case is shown in which a normal CA3-2 is classified into a normal CA3-2 and a super CA3-3, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with superreach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream together with superreach). In the example shown in FIG. 34B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 34B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1 that are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2 and a special PG 1-2 that have a specific effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 29, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used for “ordinary big hit” or “probable big hit”, and the small hit for “sudden probable big hit” or “small hit”. / Sudden probability change big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. The game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the big prize opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the big prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A20A (H)) for designating round 10.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The jackpot end designation command (A301 (H)) is used to end the jackpot game by the “normal jackpot” or the “probability big hit”. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for sudden probability variation big hit end designation in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in case of small hit. Also good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the probability change state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the time-short state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) for designating that the first starting prize has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that there has been a second start winning. In the present embodiment, hereinafter, the first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) that designates the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that specifies that 1 is added to the total pending storage count. In the present embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command. When the reserved memory number is subtracted, a total reserved memory number designation command for designating the total reserved memory number after the subtraction may be transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, a case is shown in which a combined pending storage number designation command for specifying the combined pending storage number is transmitted as a command for designating the reserved storage count. Of these, a command for designating the increased number of reserved memories may be transmitted. Specifically, when the first reserved memory increases, a first reserved memory number designation command for designating the first reserved memory number is transmitted, and when the second reserved memory increases, the second reserved memory number is designated. A second reserved memory number designation command may be transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, a start winning designation command for designating which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, 17 is designated as the hold storage information is transmitted, and the combined hold storage is performed. Although the case of transmitting the total pending storage number designation command for designating the number is shown, the effect control command transmitted as the pending storage information is not limited to that shown in the present embodiment. For example, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number addition) indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the command indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has decreased) is transmitted. (Second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small win or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range is included in the variation pattern type determination random number among the winning determination results. (Variation category command).

  In the present embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 44), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it is a big hit, a small hit, a big hit type, It is determined in which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit or the small hit or a value for designating the type of the big win is set, and control for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In the present embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the type of the big hit, Based on the category command, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type becomes a predetermined determination value, the variation pattern type can be recognized.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 38, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, if it is determined in the winning effect processing described later that it is “out of”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 1 designation command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that the “normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “suddenly promising big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that the “small hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 5 designation command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designating command and when setting a display result designating command.

  FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, in this embodiment, which gaming state is being used, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or effect symbol, the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of start winning A value is set in the EXT data according to whether the value is determined to be in any determination value range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 215 and 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-mentioned variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. 33 (A) and 33 (B). The values are derived by picking up values that can be boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. This also applies to the subsequent fluctuation categories 9 to 10 and 21 to 29, and is assigned to each fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 32 (A) to (D) and FIG. 33 (C). A threshold value used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of the range of the determined determination value.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in a probable change state or a short-time state and out of place at the time of winning a start, in step S232 of a winning effect process described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not 219. When the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 performs variation with “08 (H)” set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Note that the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 even when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short time state. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, when executing the process of step S232 of the effect process at the time of winning to be described later, if it is out of place, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the “usual big hit” is made at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the effect processing at the time of winning to be described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74. Determine whether. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the “probable big hit” is made at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Determine whether. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variable category 25 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A variation category 26 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly become a big win at the start winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. Determine. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not necessarily the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started. There may be a case where the pattern type does not actually match the variation pattern type used for variable display. However, in the present embodiment, since at least the variation pattern types of the super CA 2-7 and the super CA 3-3 are assigned a common determination value regardless of the total number of pending storage (see FIGS. 32 and 33). ), There is no inconsistency between the determination result at the time of winning and the variation pattern type of variable display that is actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern type of Super CA 2-7 or Super CA 3-3 is selected, a pre-reading notice effect described later may be executed on the variable display determined at the time of winning. Note that only when it is determined that the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 and super CA3-3, the variation category command shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 (specifically, the variation category 8 command, the variation category 23 command, the variation Category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of winning determination results for other variation pattern types. Further, if it is determined that a prize other than Super CA2-7 and Super CA3-3 is determined, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, since the common determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 regardless of the total number of pending storage (see FIG. 33), the pre-reading notice effect (so-called “gase”) A pre-reading notice effect) may be executed.

  Note that the “prefetching notice effect” is a notice effect that is executed before the start of variable display that is the subject of the notice effect. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a case will be described in which a prefetch notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the winning determination process is executed every time a start prize is generated, and the symbol designation command shown in FIG. 38 is transmitted and the variation category command shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is transmitted. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it will be a big hit or reach in advance before the variable display of the notice target is started based on the received symbol designation command or variable category command. Execute a pre-reading notice.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol whenever there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, and the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol. An effect display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the production components such as the device 9, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the production control microcomputer 100 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S27) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 determines that either the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switches 14a, 17a are on, that is, the first start winning port 13 or the second start winning ports 14, 17 If a start winning to any of the above has occurred, start port switch passing processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If neither the first start port switch 13a nor the second start port switches 14a, 17a is turned on, the start port switch passing process (step S312) is not executed, and the steps S300 to S300 are performed as they are according to the internal state. One of the processes in S310 is performed.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In the present embodiment, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 as described later. Is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 49), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S23.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening open process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the effect control microcomputer 100, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Further, a process for setting a flag (for example, a probability variation flag) indicating a gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening etc. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. Further, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in an ON state (step S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S1222. If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1222.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1213), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Further, the CPU 56 sets the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning openings 14 and 17. Data indicating “first” is set in the corresponding area (step S1215).

  In the present embodiment, when the first start port switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball is started and won at the first start winning port 13), data indicating “first” is set, 2 When the start port switches 14a and 17a are turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14 and 17), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), and the first 2 When the start port switches 14a and 17a are turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 43A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 43 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 43A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 43 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the two starting winning ports 14 and 17. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), the winning order to the first start winning port 13 and the second starting winning ports 14, 17 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Then The CPU 56 Extract a value from the random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating software random numbers, Those, Processing for storing in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 43B) is executed (step S1216). In addition, In the process of step S1216, Random R that is a hardware random number Software random number for jackpot type determination (random 1), Fluctuation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted, Stored in the save area. In addition, Instead of extracting the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3) in the start port switch passing process (at the start winning prize) and storing it in the storage area in advance, You may make it extract at the time of the fluctuation | variation start of a 1st special symbol. For example, The game control microcomputer 560 includes: In the variation pattern setting process described later, A value may be directly extracted from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3).

  FIG. 43B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 43B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In the present embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern. A random number for type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes prize-winning effect processing for preliminarily determining the display result of the variable display and the variation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start winning is executed (step S1217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1220), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1221).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switches 14a and 17a are in an on state (step S1222). If the second start port switches 14a and 17a are not in the ON state, the processing is ended as it is. If the second start port switches 14a and 17a are in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second count for counting the second reserved memory number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the reserved memory number counter is 4 (step S1223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1224), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1225). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S1226).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 43B) ( Step S1227). In the process of step S1227, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start opening switch passage process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process (step S1228). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1229), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1230).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1231), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to the EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1232).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1217 and S1228. In the winning effect process, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In the present embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing to be described later, determining the big hit type or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing Apart from that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning openings 14 and 17, before the variable display based on the start winning starts, Then, by executing the winning effect processing, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the big hit or the small win is made, and in which judgment value range the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number. By doing so, the display result of the variable display and the variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, and for the effect control based on the determination result at the time of winning as will be described later. A pre-reading notice effect is executed by the microcomputer 100.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state). It is confirmed whether or not (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. Are matched (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays may be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S221 at the time of starting winning, until the variable display based on the starting winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of variation) between the time when the variable display based on the start winning is actually started after confirming whether or not the state has been changed in step S221 at the start winning. If there is a probable big hit or sudden probable big hit before, the normal state changes to the probable state.) Therefore, the gaming state determined at step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not always match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning in the first start winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing in step S1217), the CPU 56 determines the small hit determination table (first) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for (for special symbol). When there is a start winning at the second starting winning ports 14 and 17 (when the winning effect processing at step S1228 is executed), the small hit determination table (second special symbol) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches with the small hit determination value set in (for).

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process for determining the current gaming state (step S225). In the present embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probability change state and whether or not it is a time reduction state (specifically, whether or not a probability change flag and a time reduction flag are set). judge. It should be noted that there is a plurality of times between the time when the variable display based on the start winning is actually started after the confirmation of whether or not the state is in the probable variation state and the short time state at the time of starting winning. Variable display may be performed. For this reason, the game state changes between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S225 and whether or not the time is short and the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, when a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal state may change to a probable state). For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) are not necessarily the same. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold value for detachment according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is built in, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, which determination value range the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is within. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is the probability changing state or the time saving state. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 219 in step S232 to be described later. Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 39). If the threshold value is not less than 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 39).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 39). If the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 39). If the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 39). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 39). If the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 39). If the threshold is 214 or less (that is, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 39). If the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 39). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 39).

  In the example of threshold determination described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, the threshold value is not within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the previous threshold value. It is determined whether it is in the range. In the present embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined as 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, and 199 are determined in order from the largest value. , 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even in such a configuration, the range of determination values is shared by at least the variation pattern type that is “non-reach” and the variation pattern type that is “super-reach”. It can be determined whether or not it is “out of” or “out of super reach”.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 uses the symbol designating command for the EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “small hit”. Is set (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). In the present embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251, and in step S 232 described later, determines that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251), It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 40). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing in step S1217 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (first 1D) shown in FIG. Using the special symbol 131a, it is determined whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”. When there is a start winning at the second starting winning ports 14 and 17 (when the winning effect processing at step S1228 is executed), the jackpot type determination table (second special symbol) shown in FIG. 131b is used to determine whether the big hit type is "normal big hit", "probable big hit" or "suddenly probable big hit".

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that the “normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “01 (H)” indicating the “normal big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “probability big hit” is determined, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “probability big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that the “sudden probability change big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “03 (H)” indicating “sudden probability change big hit” in the symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot classification determined by step S229 (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it is determined as “normal big hit”. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 40). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 40). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 149 (that is, 150 to 251), it is determined to set “12 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 40).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “probability big hit”, the thresholds 38 and 79 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 38 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 40). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 40). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 40).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “suddenly probable big hit”, it sets the threshold 100. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 in step S232 to be described later. Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 40). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 40).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 32 and 33) is set, and in step S232, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “09 (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 according to which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. A process of setting any value of (H) ”to“ 18 (H) ”to the EXT data of the variable category command is performed.

  In the present embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the winning pattern is determined to be a big win or a small win, the case where the range of the variation pattern type determination random number is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command comprehensively indicating that the variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . For example, although the production control microcomputer 100 does not specifically show which variation pattern type, the variation indicated that it will be one of the big hit variation pattern types. Based on the reception of the category command, a prefetch notice effect described later may be executed.

  45 and 46 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next variable symbol variable display is started.

  If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 56 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In the present embodiment, by executing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Note that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority as shown in the present embodiment, the value of the random number for random determination (random R) in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. May be executed only in comparison with the jackpot determination value in the normal state or in the short-time state, and may not be compared with the jackpot determination value in the probability variation state (specifically, only the processing in step S220 is executed). However, the processing of steps S221 and S222 may not be performed). With such a configuration, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority, the jackpot determination result in the winning determination and the jackpot determination result at the actual start of fluctuation are between It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 56 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time-short state background designation command when only the time-short flag indicating the time-short state is set and the probability variation flag is not set. If neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is given. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the microcomputer for effect control in the order of the background designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command for each timer interrupt. 100 will be transmitted. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A command for specifying the total pending storage number subtraction is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or data indicating“ second ”indicating that processing is to be performed on the second start winning prize ports 14, 17, that is,“ second ”indicating that processing is performed on the second special symbol. Is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for determining the big hit that has been extracted in step S1216 of the first start port switch passing process or step S1227 of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. A random number is read and a big hit judgment is performed. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 31) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and if they match, executes the process of determining the big hit or the small hit It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  The big hit determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is in a probable change state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is in a non-probable change state (a normal state or a short time state). Specifically, a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the value on the right side of FIG. 31A in the ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are variable. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 31A in the ROM 54 is set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 31A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be “probability big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the jackpot game is over, it is reset when the next jackpot occurs.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 31B and 31C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 31B and 31C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “probability change”) corresponding to the value of the random number for random determination (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "Suddenly probable big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S1216 of the first start port switch passing process or step S1227 of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. The random number is read and the jackpot type is determined. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 31D and 31E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “normal big hit” is decided, “3” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. If “probable big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method of determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to what is shown in the form. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and when a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on the random number for determining the big hit type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 32 (A) as tables used for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 32 (D) as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S95). The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability change state or the time reduction state, and is reset when the time reduction state ends. Specifically, when it is determined to be “ordinary jackpot”, the time reduction flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. In addition, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times). Even before the end of the predetermined number of variable displays, the time reduction flag is reset even when the next big hit occurs. Further, when it is determined to be “probability big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”, the probability variation flag is set and the time-short flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. When the next big hit occurs, the time reduction flag is reset together with the probability variation flag.

  If the time reduction flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storages is 5 or more (step S96). If the total number of pending storages is less than 5 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 33A) is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the total pending storage number is 5 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for deviation as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 33B) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a probability change state or a time reduction state (in this embodiment, the time reduction state is always entered when the state is changed to the probability change state. Since the transition is made (see steps S169 and S170), if it is determined as Y in step S95, the CPU 56 may change the variation pattern type to the probability variation state or the time-short state only). As a table used for determining one of a plurality of types, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 33C) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In the present embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S95 to S99, when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 5 or more, the variation pattern for loss shown in FIG. The type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is the probability changing state or the time-shortening state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 33C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S100, which will be described later, and when the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S102. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 35). Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is 5 or more, variable display of the shortening variation may be performed. In the present embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 33C) used in the probability variation state and the short time state, and a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage (FIG. 33). (B) is a different table, but a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In the present embodiment, even when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short time state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1). The variable display of the shortening variation may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 33A) may be selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the process of step S96 is executed so that the variable display of the shortening variation may be performed when the total number of pending storages is 5 or more. As described above, since the character change is executed when the total number of reserved storage becomes a predetermined number (eight), for example, the number of total reserved storage is reduced even with a relatively small number. If the change is configured to be executable, it is difficult for the total pending storage number to accumulate up to a predetermined number (eight) and the character change is difficult to be executed. Therefore, by making it possible to execute the shortening variation when the total number of reserved storage is relatively large, the total number of reserved storage is easily accumulated to a certain number (eight) to facilitate the character change. It is desirable to configure as follows. However, if the execution frequency of shortening fluctuations is made too low, the total number of pending storages will not be reduced because the total number of pending storages stays high around the predetermined number (8). It is desirable to set the execution frequency of shortening fluctuations so as to increase or decrease.

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the type provided with the sorting apparatus 200 as in the present embodiment, when the total number of pending storage is 5 or more, the variable display of the shortening variation may be performed. Therefore, it is difficult for the total pending storage number to be accumulated up to a predetermined number (eight), and the character change is difficult to be executed. Therefore, the selection ratio of the shortening variation may be reduced as compared with the type of game machine in which the distribution device 200 is not provided.

  For example, in a game machine of a type not provided with the distribution device 200, if the non-reach is out of order, when the number of reserved memories is “1”, the shortening variation is not selected and the number of reserved memories is “2” or If it is common to select a shortening variation at a specific rate when “3” and always select a shortening variation when the number of reserved storage is “4”, the type in which the sorting device 200 is provided In the case of the non-reach game machine, when the total pending storage number is “1” to “3”, the shortening variation is not selected, and when the total pending storage number is “4” to “6”. Select a short variation at a rate slightly lower than a specific rate, select a short variation at a specific rate when the total pending storage count is “7”, and always select a short variation when the total pending storage count is “8” To do It may be.

  Further, when the total pending storage number is “7”, the selection ratio of the shortening variation may be set lower than when the total pending storage number is “4” to “6”. By doing so, it is easy to generate a start prize in a state where the total number of reserved storage is “7”, and the frequency of character change can be improved.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer) and selects it in the process of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S100).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 34) as tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 35) is selected (step S101). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S101. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S100 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 33) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 33). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” occurs in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In consideration of a decrease in the execution ratio of the notice effect, as shown in the present embodiment, without performing a lottery process using a random number for reach determination, depending on the variation pattern type, “super reach out” or It is preferable to make a pre-reading notice effect by determining in advance whether or not “non-reach” will occur.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation) (see FIG. 36) in accordance with the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the big hit flag is set, if the type of the big hit is “normal big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Whether or not it is “ordinary big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. . Further, when the big hit type is “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). Whether or not it is “probable big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. . When neither “normal big hit” nor “probability big hit” (that is, “sudden probability big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S116), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted is determined by, for example, transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command when transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command in step S1122 described later. It is sufficient to set whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set, and whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set in step S1121. Also, in this case, the set total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completed flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol variable display ends or when the jackpot ends. do it.

  Next, if the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the total pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125). When the variable time timer times out (step S1126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56, if it is set, the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state. Is reset (step S132), and a control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “normal jackpot” or “probability jackpot”, a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit” is data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer) Based on the determination.

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the big hit has occurred) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, “15 times in case of“ normal big hit ”or“ probable big hit ”, 2 times in case of“ suddenly promising big hit ”) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S135). . The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, 0.1 seconds is set as the round time, and in the case of normal big hit or probability change big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the hourly number counter that indicates the number of times that the special symbol can be changed in the timeless state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time reduction counter by −1 (step S138). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S142). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S144). In addition, the opening time per time of the big winning opening in the small hit game is set. Specifically, 0.1 seconds which is the same as the round time for the sudden probability change big hit is set as the opening time for one big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, if it is “ordinary big hit” or “probable big hit”, a big hit end designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and if it is “sudden probable big hit”, small hit / sudden probability big hit An end designation command (command A 302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit that ends this time is a normal big hit (step S166). Whether or not it is “ordinary big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. . If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag and shifts to a time reduction state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter (step S168).

  If it is not a normal big hit (that is, if the probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit), the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag to shift to the probability variation state (step S169) and sets the time reduction flag to shift to the time reduction state. (Step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol changing process is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variable display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol variable display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol changing process), the special symbol variable display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set when the variation of the special symbol starts. At the same time, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 36 and 37) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  55 and 56 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is one of the symbol designation commands (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 first receives the symbol designation command received in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step S622).

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the command storage area at the time of starting winning a prize. As shown in FIG. 57, an area (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total pending storage number is secured in the start winning command storage area. In the present embodiment, as shown in steps S1218 to S1221 and S1229 to S1232 of the start port switch passing process of FIG. 42, there has been a start winning to the first start winning port 13 or the second start winning ports 14 and 17. Sometimes, within one timer interrupt, there are four commands: design designation command, variation category command, start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command), and total pending storage number designation command Sent as a set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 57, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command can be stored in association with each other. Thus, a storage area is secured.

  In the present embodiment, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 stores commands in the first storage area available in the start winning command storage area in the order received. In this embodiment, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the start winning designation command, and the total pending storage number designation command within one timer interrupt. As shown in FIG. 57, each of the storage areas 1 to 8 is stored in the order of a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start winning designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command (in FIG. An example in which commands are stored in areas 1 to 5 is shown).

  In the example shown in FIG. 57, a total pending storage number designation command (7) that designates the total pending storage number 7 in the storage area in which up to seven pending memories have occurred in the previous variable display and the latest command is stored. C207 (H)) is stored, and thereafter, the storage state of the command storage area at the start winning prize is shown in the situation where one hold memory is consumed and variable display based on the second hold memory is started. .

  In addition, each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 57 is displayed in step S635d to be described later every time variable display of the effect symbol is started (every time a total pending storage number subtraction designation command is received). It is deleted from what is stored in the first storage area 1, and the contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 57, when the variable display of a new effect design is started, the contents (each command and change pattern and change timing pattern described later) stored in the storage area 1 are deleted, The contents stored in the storage area 2 are shifted to the storage area 1, the contents stored in the storage area 3 are shifted to the storage area 2, and the contents stored in the storage area 4 are shifted to the storage area 3. The contents stored in the storage area 5 are shifted to the storage area 4. It should be noted that the timing at which the contents are deleted may be during the effect symbol variation start process, which will be described later, at the timing at which the effect symbol variable display is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a startup prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command received when a start prize is generated are collectively referred to as a command at the time of a prize for starting. . Further, among the commands at the time of starting winning, a starting winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command which are commands for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased, When expressed in a comprehensive manner, it is also called reserved storage information. Also, a symbol designating command, which is a command indicating whether or not a big hit or a small hit is determined in a winning effect process at the time of starting winning (see FIG. 44), a determination result of a big hit type, a determination result of a variation pattern type, and When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also referred to as a winning determination result designation command or determination result information.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 57, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area, a storage area is further secured so that a change pattern and a change timing pattern can be stored. The change pattern is a pattern (PT1A to PT7B) of the change mode of the display mode of the hold display, and is determined at the time of starting winning. Here, the details of the change pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram of a change pattern table. As shown in FIG. 58, each change pattern includes “change mode” indicating a change mode of the display mode of the hold display, and the number of times the display mode of the hold display is changed (the number of times the change to “character” is excluded). The “number of changes” and “◯” that can change the character (change the display mode to “character”) or “×” that cannot change the character are associated with each other.

  For example, PT1A and PT1B have a change pattern of 0 changes because they remain “white” and do not change. PT2A and PT2B have a change pattern of one change because they change from “white” to “blue”. PT3A and PT3B are “blue” and do not change, so that the number of changes is a change pattern of zero. Since PT4A and PT4B change from “white” to “blue” and then change to “red”, the number of changes is a change pattern of two times. PT5A and PT5B have a change pattern of one change because they change from “white” to “red”. PT6A and PT6B have a change pattern of one change since they change from “blue” to “red”. PT7A and PT7B are change patterns in which the number of changes is zero because they remain “red”.

  Hereinafter, PT1A and PT1B are “first change pattern type”, PT2A and PT2B are “second change pattern type”, PT3A and PT3B are “third change pattern type”, and PT4A and PT4B are “fourth change pattern type”. PT5A and PT5B may be referred to as “fifth change pattern type”, PT6A and PT6B may be referred to as “sixth change pattern type”, and PT7A and PT7B may be referred to as “seventh change pattern type”.

  Further, for example, PT1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A, 6A, and 7A are change patterns that cannot change characters. PT1B, 2B, 3B, 4B, 5B, 6B, and 7B are change patterns that can change characters (hereinafter, also referred to as “character changeable patterns”). In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display or the active display corresponding to the character changeable pattern is “character” on condition that the combined hold storage number is 8 when the character changeable pattern is stored. It will change to.

  In addition, since “Character” is not included in “Change Mode” in any change pattern, the display mode of the hold display can be changed to “Character” only when the total number of reserved storage is 8. It has a simple structure.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 57, there are three PT1A (change patterns that cannot change from “white” to any display mode) as the first, second, and fourth hold display change patterns. PT2A (change pattern that can change from “white” to “blue” and does not change to “character”) is the change pattern of the eye hold display, and PT4B (“white” is the change pattern of the fifth hold display. The change pattern (which can be changed to “red” after changing from “blue” to “blue” and also change to “character”) is stored.

  The change timing pattern is a pattern (T00 to T76) of change timing for changing the display mode of the hold display, and is determined at the time of starting winning. The change timing pattern includes T00 to T07 selected when the number of changes (number of changes excluding the change to “character”) is one, and T10 to T76 selected when the number of changes is two. And can be broadly divided.

  As elements of the change timing included in the change timing pattern, “active” which is the timing to start the corresponding active display, “first” which is the timing to shift to the first hold display, and the second hold “Second” which is the timing to shift to the display, “third” which is the timing to shift to the third hold display, “fourth” which is the timing to shift to the fourth hold display, 5 “5th”, which is the timing to shift to the tenth hold display, “6th”, which is the timing to shift to the sixth hold display, and “7” that is the timing to shift to the seventh hold display There are eyes.

  For example, T00 is a change timing pattern whose change timing is “active”, T01 is a change timing pattern whose change timing is “first”, and T02 is a change timing pattern “second”. It is a certain change timing pattern, T03 is a change timing pattern whose change timing is “third”, T04 is a change timing pattern whose change timing is “fourth”, and T05 is a change timing pattern. Is a change timing pattern in which the change timing is “sixth”, T06 is a change timing pattern in which the change timing is “sixth”, and T07 is a change timing pattern in which the change timing is “seventh”. is there.

  For example, T10 is a change timing pattern in which the first change timing is “first” and the second change timing is “active”.

  Further, for example, T20 is a change timing pattern in which the first change timing is “second”, and the second change timing is “active”, and T21 is the first change timing is “second”. This is a change timing pattern in which the second change timing is “first”.

  Also, for example, T30 is a change timing pattern in which the first change timing is “third”, and the second change timing is “active”, and T31 is the first change timing is “third”. A change timing pattern in which the second change timing is “first”, and T32 is a change timing in which the first change timing is “third” and the second change timing is “second”. It is a pattern.

  For example, T40 is a change timing pattern in which the first change timing is “fourth”, and the second change timing is “active”, and T41 is the first change timing is “fourth”. A change timing pattern in which the second change timing is “first”, and T42 is a change timing in which the first change timing is “fourth” and the second change timing is “second”. T43 is a change timing pattern in which the first change timing is “fourth” and the second change timing is “third”.

  Further, for example, T50 is a change timing pattern in which the first change timing is “fifth”, the second change timing is “active”, and T51 is the first change timing is “fifth”. A change timing pattern in which the second change timing is “first”, and T52 is a change timing in which the first change timing is “fifth” and the second change timing is “second”. T53 is a change timing pattern in which the first change timing is “fifth”, the second change timing is “third”, and T54 is the first change timing “5”. “Eye”, and the second change timing is the “fourth” change timing pattern.

  For example, T60 is a change timing pattern in which the first change timing is “sixth”, and the second change timing is “active”, and T61 is the first change timing “sixth”. A change timing pattern in which the second change timing is “first”, and T62 is a change timing in which the first change timing is “sixth” and the second change timing is “second”. T63 is a change timing pattern in which the first change timing is “sixth”, the second change timing is “third”, and T64 is “6” in the first change timing. The first change timing pattern is “fourth”, the second change timing is “fourth”, and T65 is the first change timing “sixth” and the second change timing. It is the change timing pattern is "five eyes".

  For example, T70 is a change timing pattern in which the first change timing is “seventh”, and the second change timing is “active”, and T71 is the first change timing is “seventh”. A change timing pattern in which the second change timing is “first”, and T72 is a change timing in which the first change timing is “seventh” and the second change timing is “second”. T73 is a change timing pattern in which the first change timing is “seventh”, the second change timing is “third”, and T74 is the first change timing “7”. The first change timing pattern is “fourth”, and the second change timing is “fourth”. T75 is the first change timing is “seventh” and the second change timing. Is the change timing pattern is "five eyes", T76 is, first of change timing is "7 th", change the timing of the second time is a change timing pattern is "6 th".

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 57, T02 is stored as the third hold display change timing pattern, and T32 is stored as the fifth hold display change timing pattern. When a change pattern having a display mode change count of 0 (excluding changes to “character”) is stored, the change timing pattern is not stored because there is no change timing. (For example, see the first, second and fourth storage areas.)

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Of these, the latest symbol designating command is stored in the storage area (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first start prize designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received first start prize designation command in each start prize command storage area formed in the RAM. It stores in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored in the storage area (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is the second start prize designation command (step S628), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received second start prize designation command in each start prize command storage area formed in the RAM. The storage area is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored (step S629).

  If the received production control command is a combined pending storage number designation command (step S631), the production control CPU 101 uses the received aggregate pending storage number designation command for each start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. In the storage area, the latest symbol designation command, variation category command, and start prize designation command (first start prize designation command, second start prize designation command) are stored in the storage area (step S632). Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the total pending storage number designated by the total pending storage number designation command in the total pending storage number storage area provided in the RAM (step S633).

  If the received effect control command is a total pending storage number subtraction designation command (step S634), the effect control CPU 101 deletes one on-hold display on the total on-hold storage display unit 18c and displays the remaining on-hold display one by one. Based on the change pattern and change timing pattern stored in the start winning command storage area, the total pending storage number display in the total pending storage display unit 18c is updated (step S635). Specifically, referring to the change timing pattern stored in each storage area, it is determined whether or not there is a pending display that reaches the change timing. Referring to, the display mode of the hold display is changed. For example, since the change timing pattern corresponding to the storage area 3 in FIG. 57 is T02, the display mode of the corresponding hold display at the timing of shifting to the second hold display (when executing step S635 next time). Will be changed. At this time, since the stored change pattern is PT2A, it is changed from “white” to “blue”.

  It should be noted that even if the hold display reaches the change timing in step S635, if the hold display has already been changed to “character”, the display mode of the hold display does not change.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts active display (step S635a). Here, the active display is started in the display mode based on the change pattern and the change timing pattern stored in the storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area. For example, when a change timing pattern (any of T00, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70) including “active” is stored in the storage area 1, the associated change Active display is started in the last display mode (“blue” or “red”) in the pattern. Further, for example, when a change timing pattern not including “active” (any one other than T00, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70) is stored in the storage area 1, the summation pending The active display is started in the display mode displayed in the first display area of the storage display unit 18c. When the display mode displayed in the first display area is “character”, the storage area 1 includes a change timing pattern (T00, 10, 20, 30, 40, including “active”). 50, 60, or 70) is stored, the active display of “character” is started.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the change pattern of the storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area is a character changeable pattern (PT1B, 2B, 3B, 4B, 5B, 6B, 7B). (Step S635b) If it is not the character changeable pattern, the process proceeds to Step S635d. If it is a character changeable pattern, an active changeable flag indicating that the display mode of the active display can be changed to “character” is set (step S635c).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 deletes the data in the storage area 1 in the start winning command storage area, and shifts and stores the remaining data (step S635d). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the total reserved memory number stored in the total reserved memory number storage area (step S636).

  The processing in steps S635 to S636 may be executed based on receiving a command (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 at the start of variation. In this case, the total pending storage number subtraction designation command may not be transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560.

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S637). For example, if the effect control command received is the first symbol variation designation command, the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set, and if the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command is set. Set the reception flag. Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a hold display control process for performing control related to the hold display (step S800A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variable display is executed depending on which effect control process processing is executing the variable display of the effect symbols.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the hold display control process. In the hold display control process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a new start winning command is received (step S3501), and if not received, the hold display control process ends. When a new start winning command is received, it is determined whether or not the received start winning command includes information indicating that it is a big win or a small win (step S3502). Specifically, it can be determined whether or not the big hit or the small hit is made by at least one of the symbol designation command and the variation category command.

  When it is a big hit or a small hit, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the effect mode A is controlled (step S3503). In the present embodiment, an effect mode A and an effect mode B are provided as effect modes having different selection tendencies of the change pattern of the display mode of the hold display and the change timing pattern. For example, in the production mode A, the “blue” or “red” that is the second mode is more easily changed to the “character” that is the specific mode than the “white” that is the first mode. ”Or“ seventh ”is an effect mode that makes it easy to select a change timing pattern. On the other hand, in the production mode B, the “white” as the first aspect is more easily changed to the “character” as the specific aspect than the “blue” and “red” as the second aspect. ”Or“ seventh ”is an effect mode in which it is difficult to select a change timing pattern (that is,“ white ”which is the first aspect is easily continued). Which production mode is controlled can be determined by using a flag. For example, if a flag indicating that the mode is effect mode A is used, it is possible to determine which effect mode is controlled by determining whether or not the flag is set. The flag may be set when controlling to the production mode A (for example, step S8320C described later).

  In step S3503, in the case of the production mode A, the production control CPU 101 selects the first winning change pattern determination table (step S3504), whereas in the case of the production mode B, the second winning change. A pattern determination table is selected (step S3505). In step S3502, if the information that is a big hit or a small hit is not included, that is, if the newly generated hold storage is a loss hold, a change pattern determination table for loss is selected (step S3506).

  Then, the production control CPU 101 performs a change pattern determination lottery for determining a change pattern using the change pattern determination table selected in any of steps S3504 to S3506 (step S3507).

  Here, the change pattern determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. Each change pattern determination table includes a selection ratio for each winning determination result for the change pattern. In parentheses in the change pattern column, (○) indicates a change pattern (character change pattern) in which the character can be changed, and (x) indicates a change pattern in which the character cannot be changed. Yes. Also, different selection ratios are provided for the case where the total pending storage number is “1” and the case where it is “2 or more”, and when the total pending storage number is “1”, the changeable timing Therefore, PT4A and 4B, which are change patterns with two changes, are not selected.

  Further, the column “A + B” in the selection ratio when the winning determination result is a probable big hit indicates the sum of the selection ratios with the associated change patterns. For example, in the column “A + B” shown in FIG. 61, from the top, the sum of the selection ratios of PT1A and PT1B (that is, the selection ratio of the first change pattern type) when the total number of pending storages is “1”, PT2A And the selection ratio of PT2B (that is, the selection ratio of the second change pattern type), the sum of the selection ratios of PT3A and PT3B (that is, the selection ratio of the third change pattern type), and the sum of the selection ratios of PT4A and PT4B ( That is, the selection ratio of the fourth change pattern type), the sum of the selection ratios of PT5A and PT5B (ie, the selection ratio of the fifth change pattern type), and the sum of the selection ratios of PT6A and PT6B (ie, the sixth change pattern type). Selection ratio), the sum of the selection ratios of PT7A and PT7B (that is, the selection ratio of the seventh change pattern type).The same applies to the case where the total pending storage number in FIG. 61 is “2 or more” and FIG.

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a first winning change pattern determination table used when the effect mode is A and the winning determination result is a big hit or a small hit.

  First, a case where the first per-change pattern determination table is used when the total pending storage number is “1” will be described.

  When the winning judgment result is a probable big hit (when the design designation command is C402 (H)), PT1A is 4%, PT2A is 6%, PT2B is 3%, and PT2B is 10%. PT3A at a rate of 4%, PT3B at a rate of 15%, PT5A at a rate of 15%, PT5B at a rate of 4%, PT6A at a rate of 19%, PT6B at a rate of 5%, 20% PT7A is selected at a rate of 10%. At this time, the selection ratio of the first change pattern type is 4%, the selection ratio of the second change pattern type is 9%, the selection ratio of the third change pattern type is 14%, and the fourth change pattern type The selection ratio of the fifth change pattern type is 19%, the selection ratio of the sixth change pattern type is 24%, and the selection ratio of the seventh change pattern type is 30%. .

  When the winning determination result is usually a big win (when the design designation command is C401 (H)), PT1A is 5%, PT2A is 10%, PT3A is 15%, 20% PT5A is selected at a rate of 25%, PT6A is selected at a rate of 25%, and PT7A is selected at a rate of 25%.

  When the winning judgment result is suddenly a big hit or a small win (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), PT1A is 10% and PT2A is 20%. % PT3A, 20% PT5A, 20% PT6A and 20% PT7A, respectively.

  Next, a case where the first per-change pattern determination table is used when the total pending storage number is “2 or more” will be described.

  When the winning judgment result is a probable big hit (when the design designation command is C402 (H)), PT1A is 1% at a rate of 2%, PT2A at a rate of 1%, PT2B at a rate of 1%, 3% PT3A at a rate of 2%, PT3B at a rate of 8%, PT4A at a rate of 8%, PT4B at a rate of 2%, PT5A at a rate of 15%, PT5B at a rate of 5%, 18% PT6A is selected at a rate of 10%, PT6B is selected at a rate of 23%, and PT7A is selected at a rate of 10%. At this time, the selection ratio of the first change pattern type is 1%, the selection ratio of the second change pattern type is 3%, the selection ratio of the third change pattern type is 5%, and the fourth change pattern type The selection ratio of the fifth change pattern type is 20%, the selection ratio of the sixth change pattern type is 28%, and the selection ratio of the seventh change pattern type is 33%. .

  When the winning determination result is usually a big win (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H)), PT1A is 3%, PT2A is 6%, PT3A is 8%, and PT3A is 10%. PT4A is selected at a rate of 18%, PT5A is selected at a rate of 18%, PT6A is selected at a rate of 25%, and PT7A is selected at a rate of 30%.

  When the winning determination result is suddenly a big hit or a small win (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), PT1A is 10% and PT2A is 10%. % PT3A, 10% PT4A, 20% PT5A, 20% PT6A and 20% PT7A.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a second winning change pattern determination table used when the effect mode is B and the winning determination result is a big hit or a small hit.

  First, a case where the second per-change pattern determination table is used when the total pending storage number is “1” will be described.

  When the winning determination result is a probable big hit (when the symbol designating command is C402 (H)), PT1B is 6%, PT2A is 4%, PT2B is 10%, and PT2B is 10%. PT3A at a rate of 4%, PT3B at a rate of 16%, PT5A at a rate of 16%, PT5B at a rate of 3%, PT6A at a rate of 22%, PT6B at a rate of 2%, 27% PT7A is selected at a rate of 1%. At this time, the selection ratio of the first change pattern type is 6%, the selection ratio of the second change pattern type is 9%, the selection ratio of the third change pattern type is 14%, and the fourth change pattern type The selection ratio of the fifth change pattern type is 19%, the selection ratio of the sixth change pattern type is 24%, and the selection ratio of the seventh change pattern type is 28%. .

  When the winning determination result is usually a big win (when the design designation command is C401 (H)), PT1A is 5%, PT2A is 10%, PT3A is 15%, 20% PT5A is selected at a rate of 25%, PT6A is selected at a rate of 25%, and PT7A is selected at a rate of 25%.

  When the winning judgment result is suddenly a big hit or a small win (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), PT1A is 10% and PT2A is 20%. % PT3A, 20% PT5A, 20% PT6A and 20% PT7A, respectively.

  Next, a case where the second per-change pattern determination table is used when the total pending storage number is “2 or more” will be described.

  When the winning determination result is a probable big hit (when the symbol designating command is C402 (H)), PT1B is 7%, PT2A is 2%, PT2B is 6%, and PT2B is 4%. PT3A at a rate of 5%, PT3B at a rate of 6%, PT4A at a rate of 6%, PT4B at a rate of 4%, PT5A at a rate of 12%, PT5B at a rate of 3%, 21% PT6A is selected at a rate of 2%, PT6B is selected at a rate of 27%, PT7A is selected at a rate of 1%, and PT7B is selected at a rate of 1%. At this time, the selection rate of the first change pattern type is 7%, the selection rate of the second change pattern type is 8%, the selection rate of the third change pattern type is 9%, and the fourth change pattern type The selection ratio of the fifth change pattern type is 15%, the selection ratio of the sixth change pattern type is 23%, and the selection ratio of the seventh change pattern type is 28%. .

  When the winning determination result is usually a big win (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H)), PT1A is 3%, PT2A is 6%, PT3A is 8%, and PT3A is 10%. PT4A is selected at a rate of 18%, PT5A is selected at a rate of 18%, PT6A is selected at a rate of 25%, and PT7A is selected at a rate of 30%.

  When the winning determination result is suddenly a big hit or a small win (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), PT1A is 10% and PT2A is 10%. % PT3A, 10% PT4A, 20% PT5A, 20% PT6A and 20% PT7A.

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing a change pattern determination table for losing used when the winning determination result is losing.

  First, a case where the shift change pattern determination table is used when the total pending storage number is “1” will be described.

  When the winning determination result is out of super reach (when the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), PT1A is 24 at a rate of 30%. % PT2A, 19% PT3A, 14% PT5A, 9% PT6A and 4% PT7A.

  When the winning determination result is other (when the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variable category command is other than C607 (H), C609 (H)), PT1A is 15% at a rate of 80%. PT2A is selected at a rate of 5% and PT3A is selected at a rate of 5%.

  Next, a case where the shift change pattern determination table is used when the total pending storage number is “2 or more” will be described.

  When the winning determination result is out of super reach (when the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), PT1A is 20 at a rate of 30%. % PT2A, 18% PT3A, 15% PT4A, 10% PT5A, 5% PT6A and 2% PT7A, respectively. The

  When the winning determination result is other (when the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variable category command is other than C607 (H), C609 (H)), PT1A is 15% at a rate of 80%. PT2A is selected at a rate of 5% and PT3A is selected at a rate of 5%.

  When the change pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 61 to 63 are compared, the selection ratio for each change pattern type in the case of the big hit or the small hit is at least the first change pattern type when the total number of pending storages is 2 or more. <Second change pattern type <Third change pattern type <Fourth change pattern type <Fifth change pattern type <Sixth change pattern type <Seventh change pattern type On the other hand, the selection ratio for each change pattern type in the case of deviation is: first change pattern type> second change pattern type> third change pattern type> fourth change pattern type> fifth change pattern type> sixth change pattern Type> 7th change pattern type. Therefore, the reliability for the big hit or the small hit is: first change pattern type <second change pattern type <third change pattern type <fourth change pattern type <fifth change pattern type <sixth change pattern type < This is the seventh change pattern type.

  Here, paying attention to the change mode (see FIG. 58) in each change pattern type, the change pattern type including “blue” is the big hit or the small hit than the change pattern type including “white”. There is a high degree of reliability. Similarly, the change pattern type including “red” is more reliable for the big hit or the small hit than the change pattern type including “blue”. Also, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, since the character changeable pattern is a change pattern that can be selected only when the probability variation is a big hit, the “character” can change only when the probability variation big hit. It is a change mode. As a result, the reliability with respect to the probability big hit is “white” <“blue” <“red” <“character”.

  In the first winning change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 61, when the winning determination result is a probable big hit, the character change pattern selection ratio (PT1B: 0%) with respect to the first change pattern type selection ratio is In addition to being 0%, the selection ratio of the character change pattern with respect to the selection ratio of the second change pattern type to the seventh change pattern type is higher than 0%. The selection ratio of PT1B, which is the character change pattern in the first change pattern type, is the selection ratio of PT2B, 3B, 4B, 5B, 6B, 7B, which is the character change pattern in the second change pattern type to the seventh change pattern type. Lower than. Therefore, in the production mode A, “blue” or “blue” or “blue” is already displayed, rather than the ratio of the hold display that is displayed in “white” and is not scheduled to change to “blue” or “red” in the future. The rate at which the hold display that is displayed in “red” or is scheduled to change to “blue” or “red” in the future changes to “character” is higher. Thereby, in the production mode A, by changing to “blue” or “red”, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for changing to the “character”.

  Also, in the second winning change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62, when the winning determination result is a probable big hit, the character change pattern selection ratio (PT1B: 6%) with respect to the second change pattern type selection ratio is In addition to 100%, the selection ratio of the character change pattern with respect to the selection ratio of the second change pattern type to the seventh change pattern type is lower than 100%. The selection ratio of PT1B, which is the character change pattern in the first change pattern type, is the selection ratio of PT2B, 3B, 4B, 5B, 6B, 7B, which is the character change pattern in the second change pattern type to the seventh change pattern type. Higher than. Therefore, in the production mode B, the percentage of the hold display that is already displayed in “blue” or “red” or that is scheduled to change to “blue” or “red” in the future changes to “character”. However, the percentage of the hold display that is displayed as “white” and is not scheduled to change to “blue” or “red” in the future changes to “character” is higher. Thereby, in the production mode B, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for changing to the “character” while being displayed in “white” without changing to “blue” or “red”. .

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs a change timing determination lottery to determine a change timing pattern (step S3508). Specifically, the change timing determination table is selected based on the change pattern determined in step S3507 and the effect mode being controlled, and the change timing is determined based on the total number of pending storage. Here, the change timing determination table will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Each change timing determination table shown in FIG. 64 to FIG. 66 is associated with the selection ratio of the change timing pattern for each total pending storage number (1 to 8). Each change timing pattern is associated with a specific change timing.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram of a first change timing determination table. The first change timing determination table A shown in FIG. 64 (A) is a change timing determination table used when the number of changes of the change pattern determined in step S3507 is “1” and controlled in the production mode A. It is.

  For example, in the first change timing determination table A shown in FIG. 64A, when the total pending storage number is “1”, T00 is selected as a change timing pattern at a rate of 100%. When the total pending storage number is “2”, T00 is selected as a change timing pattern at a rate of 40% and T01 is selected at a rate of 60%. When the total pending storage number is “3”, T00 is selected as a change timing pattern at a rate of 20%, T01 is selected at a rate of 30%, and T02 is selected at a rate of 50%. When the total number of pending storages is “4”, as a change timing pattern, T00 is selected at a rate of 20%, T01 is set at a rate of 20%, T02 is set at a rate of 30%, and T03 is selected at a rate of 30%. Is done. When the total pending storage number is “5”, as a change timing pattern, T00 is a ratio of 10%, T01 is a ratio of 20%, T02 is a ratio of 20%, T03 is a ratio of 20%, and T04 Is selected at a rate of 30%. When the total number of pending storages is “6”, as a change timing pattern, T00 is 15%, T01 is 15%, T02 is 15%, T03 is 15%, T04 Is selected at a rate of 20% and T05 is selected at a rate of 20%. When the total number of pending storages is “7”, as a change timing pattern, T00 is a rate of 10%, T01 is a rate of 10%, T02 is a rate of 15%, T03 is a rate of 15%, T04 Is selected at a rate of 15%, T05 at a rate of 15%, and T06 at a rate of 20%. When the total pending storage number is “8”, the change timing pattern is as follows: T00 is 5%, T01 is 5%, T02 is 10%, T03 is 10%, T04 Is selected at a rate of 15%, T05 at a rate of 15%, T06 at a rate of 20%, and T07 at a rate of 20%.

  The first change timing determination table B shown in FIG. 64 (B) is a change timing determination table used when the change number of the change pattern determined in step S3507 is “1” and controlled in the production mode B. It is.

  For example, in the first change timing determination table B shown in FIG. 64B, when the total number of pending storages is “1”, T00 is selected as a change timing pattern at a rate of 100%. When the total pending storage number is “2”, T00 is selected as a change timing pattern at a rate of 60% and T01 is selected at a rate of 40%. When the total pending storage number is “3”, T00 is selected as a change timing pattern at a rate of 50%, T01 is selected at a rate of 30%, and T02 is selected at a rate of 20%. When the total number of pending storage is “4”, the change timing pattern is selected as T00 at a rate of 30%, T01 at a rate of 30%, T02 at a rate of 20%, and T03 at a rate of 20%. Is done. When the total number of pending storages is “5”, as a change timing pattern, T00 is 30%, T01 is 20%, T02 is 20%, T03 is 20%, T04 Is selected at a rate of 10%. When the total number of pending storages is “6”, as a change timing pattern, T00 is 20%, T01 is 20%, T02 is 15%, T03 is 15%, T04 Is selected at a rate of 15% and T05 is selected at a rate of 15%. When the total number of pending storages is “7”, the change timing pattern includes T00 at a rate of 20%, T01 at a rate of 20%, T02 at a rate of 15%, T03 at a rate of 15%, and T04. Is selected at a rate of 15%, T05 at a rate of 10%, and T06 at a rate of 5%. When the total pending storage number is “8”, as a change timing pattern, T00 is a ratio of 20%, T01 is a ratio of 20%, T02 is a ratio of 15%, T03 is a ratio of 15%, T04 Is selected at a rate of 10%, T05 at a rate of 10%, T06 at a rate of 5%, and T07 at a rate of 5%.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram of the second change timing determination table A. The second change timing determination table A shown in FIG. 64 is a change timing determination table used when the number of changes of the change pattern determined in step S3507 is “2” and the effect mode A is controlled.

  For example, in the second change timing determination table A shown in FIG. 65, when the total number of pending storages is “2”, T10 is selected as a change timing pattern at a rate of 100%. When the total pending storage number is “3”, T10 is selected as a change timing pattern at a rate of 10%, T20 is set at a rate of 20%, and T21 is set at a rate of 70%. When the total pending storage number is “4”, T10 and T20 are selected as a change timing pattern at a rate of 10%, and T21 to T32 are selected at a rate of 20%. When the total pending storage number is “5”, T10 to T43 are selected at a rate of 10% as the change timing pattern. When the total pending storage number is “6”, T10 to T31 are selected at a rate of 6% and T32 to T54 are selected at a rate of 7%, respectively, as a change timing pattern. When the total pending storage number is “7”, as the change timing pattern, T10 to T31 are each 2%, T32 to T54 are 3%, and T60 to T65 are 10%, Selected. When the total pending storage number is “8”, as the change timing pattern, T10 to T54 are each 1%, T60 to T72 are each 6%, and T73 to T75 are each 7%, T76 is selected at a rate of 10%.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of the second change timing determination table B. The second change timing determination table B shown in FIG. 64 is a change timing determination table used when the number of changes of the change pattern determined in step S3507 is “2” and the effect mode B is controlled.

  For example, in the second change timing determination table B shown in FIG. 66, when the total pending storage number is “2”, T10 is selected as a change timing pattern at a rate of 100%. When the total number of pending storages is “3”, T10 is selected as a change timing pattern at a rate of 70%, T20 at a rate of 20%, and T21 at a rate of 10%. When the total pending storage number is “4”, T10 to T30 are selected as a change timing pattern at a rate of 20%, and T31 and T32 are selected at a rate of 10%. When the total pending storage number is “5”, T10 to T43 are selected at a rate of 10% as the change timing pattern. When the total pending storage number is “6”, T10 to T43 are selected at a rate of 7% and T50 to T54 are selected at a rate of 6%, respectively, as a change timing pattern. When the total pending storage number is “7”, as the change timing pattern, T10 to T54 are each at a rate of 6%, T60 to T63 are each at a rate of 3%, and T64 and T65 are at a rate of 1%, Selected. When the total pending storage number is “8”, T10 to T54 are selected as a change timing pattern at a rate of 5%, T60 to T75 are set at a rate of 2%, and T76 is set at a rate of 1%. .

  Thus, in the effect mode A, a relatively early timing is easily determined as the change timing (see FIGS. 64A and 65). Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the display mode changes to “blue” or “red” at an early time after the hold display is started (for example, immediately after the start winning is generated).

  In particular, when the total pending storage number is “7” or “8”, it is easy to select T06, T07, T60 to T76 which are change timing patterns including “sixth” and “seventh” as the change timing. . That is, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the sixth or seventh is easily changed to “blue” or “red”. As described above, in the effect mode A, since the rate of changing the character from “blue” or “red” is higher than the rate of changing the character from “white”, it is stored in the 6th and 7th. By making it easy to change the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold memory to “blue” or “red”, the player is expected to experience the character change by accumulating the remaining few hold memories. It can be given and active games can be promoted.

  In this way, in the effect mode B, a relatively late timing is easily determined as the change timing (see FIGS. 64B and 66). Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the display mode changes to “blue” or “red” at a later time after the hold display is started (for example, immediately before the corresponding fluctuation is started). .

  In particular, when the total pending storage number is “7” or “8”, it is difficult to select T06, T07, and T60 to T76 which are change timing patterns including “sixth” and “seventh” as the change timing. . In other words, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the sixth or seventh is less likely to change to “blue” or “red” (“white” is likely to continue). . As described above, in the rendering mode B, since the rate of character change from “white” is higher than the rate of change of “blue” or “red” characters, the hold stored in the sixth and seventh characters is stored. By making the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the memory difficult to change to “blue” or “red” (“white” is easy to continue), character change occurs by accumulating a small number of the remaining hold memories. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and to promote aggressive games.

  After step S3508, the lottery results of the change pattern determination lottery (step S3507) and the change timing determination lottery (step S3508) are stored in the start winning command storage area (step S3509), and the display mode according to the determined change pattern is displayed. Display of a new hold display is started (step S3510). For example, if any one of PT1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 4A, 4B, 5A, and 5B is determined, display of the hold display is started with “white”, and any one of PT3A, 3B, 6A, and 6B is started. Is determined, the display of the hold display is started at “blue”, and the display of the hold display is started at “red” if any one of the PTs 7A and 7B is determined. Thereafter, a character change process for changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display to “character” is performed (step S3511), and the hold display control process is ended.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the character change process. In the character change process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the total pending storage number is “8” (step S3701), and if it is not “8”, the character change process ends. If it is “8”, that is, if the newly generated on-hold storage is the eighth on-hold storage, the execution of the suggestion effect is ended if it has been executed (step S3702). The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the possibility that reserved memory that can change the character is stored.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the displayed flag indicating that the hold display whose display mode has been changed to “character” has already been displayed is set (step S3703). If so, the character change process is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, the occurrence of a character change is restricted in a plurality of hold displays or active displays. However, a configuration in which a character change can occur in a plurality of hold displays or active displays may be used. .

  If the displayed flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the active changeable flag is set (step S3704). Is stored (step S3705). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a character change pattern is stored in the start winning command storage area.

  In the case where a hold memory capable of changing characters (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “changeable hold memory”) is stored, the effect control CPU 101 normally deviates from all the hold memories stored before the changeable hold memory. It is determined whether it is on hold (step S3706). Specifically, in the storage area before the storage area in which the character change pattern is stored, all the symbol designation commands are C400 (H), and all the variation category commands are C600 (H) or C608 (H). In this case, it is determined that all the hold memories stored before the changeable hold memory are normally out of hold. If all of the hold memories stored before the changeable hold memory are not normally out of hold, the character change process is terminated. In this way, when the big hit hold or the out-of-reach hold is included in the hold storage stored before the changeable hold storage, the execution of the character change is limited. If the “character” hold display is displayed, and if a big hit is caused by a change before the hold display, the effect of changing the character may be reduced. Accordingly, when the big hit hold or the reach off hold is included in the hold storage stored before the changeable hold storage, it is possible to prevent the effect of the character change from being lowered by restricting the execution of the character change. it can. Note that when the hold storage stored before the changeable hold storage includes out-of-reach hold, the execution of character change may not be limited.

  When all the hold memories stored before the corresponding hold memory are normally off-hold, the effect control CPU 101 sets the display mode of the corresponding hold display (the hold display corresponding to the hold storage capable of changing the character) as “ It is changed to “character” (step S3707). When a plurality of hold memories capable of changing characters are stored, the display mode in the earliest hold display (hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored at the oldest timing) among the corresponding hold displays is displayed. It shall be changed to “Character”. Thereafter, the CPU for effect control 101 executes the special effect by starting display of the special background (step S3709), and sets the displayed flag (step S3710).

  If the active change enable flag is set in step S3704, the effect control CPU 101 changes the display mode of the active display to “character” (step S3708), and proceeds to step S3709. By executing steps S3704 and S3708, the active display is preferentially changed in character even when the reserved memory capable of changing the character is stored.

  In the present embodiment, even when a start prize has already been generated in a state where the total number of pending storages is already “8” (that is, when a start prize that does not contribute to fluctuations) has occurred, it is shown in FIG. Although the character change process is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the character change process may be executed only when a start prize is generated in a state where the total number of reserved storage is “7”.

  In addition to the above-described conditions (for example, the total number of pending storages is a specific number), the player's action (for example, an operation on the push button 120) is added as the character change occurrence condition. It is good as well. For example, an operation promotion display that prompts an operation to the push button 120 is displayed on the effect display device 9 when the total number of reserved memories becomes “8”, and only after the operation on the push button 120 is detected, step S3704 and subsequent steps. If the above process is executed and the character change process is not detected, the character change process may be terminated as it is.

  Alternatively, a lottery of a predetermined ratio may be performed when the character change occurrence condition is satisfied, and the character change may be executed based on the lottery result. For example, when it is Y in step S3704 or Y in step S3706, the lottery may be performed, and steps S3707 and S3708 may be executed at a predetermined ratio. At this time, if the character change execution target is a hold display, the character change execution rate (which can be executed in the lottery) is based on the number of the hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored. The determined ratio) may be different. For example, when the hold display of the character change execution target is the hold display corresponding to the first hold memory, the ratio is higher than when the hold display corresponding to the eighth hold memory is displayed. The execution of the character change may be determined, and conversely, when the hold display of the character change execution target is the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage, the eighth hold is performed. The execution of the character change may be determined at a lower rate than in the case of the hold display corresponding to the storage.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the pattern command is received, the production symbol variation start processing is started and the production symbol variable display is started. Therefore, if the display result designation command is received without receiving the variation pattern command, the production symbol variable display is not performed. Not started.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8000). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read out in step S8000 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8001). That is, the display control result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the design symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means by executing the process of step S8001 by the CPU 101 for the effect control. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. If the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the chance stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8001. The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbols in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8001, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 70, when the received display result designation command indicates “ordinary big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops. A combination of effect symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same even number as symbols is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates “probable big hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses 3 symbols as stop symbols. A combination of performance symbols arranged with the same odd number of symbols is determined.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol. In addition, a symbol reminiscent of being in a probabilistic state (in this embodiment, an odd symbol) is also referred to as a probable variable symbol, and a symbol reminiscent of being in a probable state (an even symbol in this embodiment) is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol. .

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a notice effect (for example, a step-up notice effect, a character notice effect, a group notice effect, or a button notice effect) on the effect display device 9 during variable display of the effect symbol. A notice effect setting process is executed to determine (step S8002).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the displayed flag is set (step S8002A), and if it is not set, that is, if the “character” hold display is not being displayed, the suggestion effect is displayed. The suggestion effect execution lottery for determining the presence or absence of execution is performed (step S8002B). Specifically, the presence / absence of execution of the suggestion effect is determined using the suggestion effect execution lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram of a suggestion effect execution lottery table. In the suggestion effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 71, the selection ratio with respect to the presence / absence of the suggestion effect is associated with each character change plan presence / absence. When there is a hold display that can change the character (when a character change pattern is stored in any storage area), the character change schedule is “Yes”, and there is no hold display that can change the character (some The character change schedule is “None” when the character change pattern is not stored in the storage area.

  For example, when the character change schedule is “Yes”, execution of the suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and not executed is determined at a rate of 20%. When the character change schedule is “none”, execution of the suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and not executed at a rate of 95%.

  In addition, it is good also as determining the presence or absence of execution of a suggestion effect in a different ratio based on the total number of pending storage. For example, the suggestion effect execution rate may be higher as the total number of pending storages increases, and conversely, the execution rate of the suggestion effect may be higher as the total number of reserved storages is smaller.

  In the suggestion effect execution lottery, when it is determined to execute the suggestion effect (Y in step S8002C), execution of the suggestion effect is started (step S8002D). Specifically, a character display such as “It may be good to collect up to 8 holds” is performed (see FIG. 76). In addition, the suggestion effect of a different aspect may be performed according to the effect mode currently controlled. The suggestion effect started here ends when the change ends or the total pending storage number becomes “8”.

  In step S8002A, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8003 when the displayed flag is set. Thus, when there is a pending display whose display mode has changed to “character”, the suggestion effect cannot be executed. Note that, even when the total pending storage number is already “8”, the processing of steps S8002B to S8002D may not be executed.

  In addition, it is good also as a some production | presentation aspect being provided as the production | presentation aspect of suggestion presentation. In that case, it is good also as changing the selection ratio of the production | presentation aspect of a suggestion effect based on whether the execution object of character change is a hold display or an active display. Further, the selection ratio of the effect mode of the suggestive effect may be varied based on whether there is a hold display or an active display that can change the character.

  Next, when executing the variation pattern and the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect (step S8003). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8004).

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation aspect constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 72 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  When it is determined to execute the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect in step S8003.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), effects device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component as an effect component) The control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect part is executed (step S8005). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbols are variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of corresponding variation patterns.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8006).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8010).

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation in-process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 first decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S8101) and decrements the value of the variation time timer by 1 (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105).

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8106), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8107).

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In the present embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, and therefore the processing of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (offset symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8302). Then, the effect control CPU 101 deletes the active display (step S8302A), and ends the suggestion effect execution if it is executed (step S8302B). Note that the case where the suggestion effect is executed at this timing is a case where execution of the suggestion effect is started at the start of fluctuation, but up to eight reserved memories are not accumulated.

  After that, if neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, if the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the CPU 101 for effect control. Moves on to step S8320A.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S8304). The completed flag and the active changeable flag are reset (step S8304A). If the flag is displayed, the display of the special background is terminated (that is, the special effect is terminated) (step S8304B). In addition, when the displayed flag is set at this timing, or when the special effect is being executed, the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed to “character” in the variation to end the execution. It is. In addition, the case where the active changeable flag is set at this timing is a case where up to eight reserved memories are not accumulated due to a change to end the execution.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 receives a big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a big hit start designation command has been received or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command has been received. It is confirmed whether the reception flag is set (step S8305). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and responds to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S8307). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) In accordance with data 1, movable member control data 1), the production device (production display device 9 as production component, various lamps as production component, speaker 27 as production component, and control of movable member as production component are controlled. (Step S8309) Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (Step S804) (Step S8310).

  When it is determined that neither big win nor small win is made (N in Step S8303), the production control CPU 101 executes the production mode transition lottery for determining whether or not the production mode is to be changed (Step S8303). S8320A). Specifically, the presence / absence of the transition to the effect mode is determined using the effect mode transition lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram of an effect mode transition lottery table. In the effect mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 75, the selection ratio for whether or not to shift the effect mode is associated with each variable display result.

  For example, when the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined to shift the effect mode at a rate of 20%, and not to change the effect mode at a rate of 80%. Further, for example, when the variable display result is out of place, it is determined to shift the effect mode at a rate of 5%, and it is determined not to shift the effect mode at a rate of 95%.

  When it is determined that the effect mode transition is determined by the effect mode transition lottery (Y in step S8320B), an effect mode transition control process for shifting the effect mode is performed (step S8320C). For example, when the mode is controlled to the production mode A, the production mode B is controlled by resetting the production mode A flag indicating that the production mode A is controlled, and the production mode B is controlled. The effect mode A is controlled by setting the effect mode A flag. Further, the mode display (see FIG. 76) indicating the controlled effect mode is switched so that the player can recognize which effect mode is controlled.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was set as the structure which can transfer production | presentation mode for every fluctuation | variation, it is not restricted to this. For example, the transition control of the production mode may be limited during a period from the execution mode transition control to a predetermined fluctuation. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to frequent transition of the production mode.

  The presence / absence of the transition to the production mode may not be determined by lottery. For example, the player's operation (for example, operation of the push button 120) is detected (the player can select any production mode). The effect mode may be shifted when triggered by occurrence of a big hit or a small hit or a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

  Further, the processing of steps S8320A to S8320C may not be executed at the end of the change, and may be executed at the start of the change, for example.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 68, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process and the fourth symbol process, so as shown in the present embodiment, in the effect symbol variation stop process at the end of the variation, etc. It is desirable to reset or to reset in the jackpot end effect processing at the end of the jackpot. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the effect display device 9 when a character change occurs. The display example shown in FIG. 76 shows a display example of the effect display device 9 at each timing for each effect mode being controlled.

  First, the character change in the production mode A will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 76 (A1), when the hold display 54A is displayed in “red”, a new change is started and the suggestive effect 54B is started (see FIG. 69). A character change pattern is stored in the start winning command storage area corresponding to the hold display 54A. At this time, the player is informed by the mode display 54C that the effect mode A is being controlled, and the hold display 54A is displayed in “red” that is easy to change in the effect mode A. It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation that a character change will occur, and to promote aggressive game ball launch.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (A2), a start winning is generated and a new hold display 54D is displayed. At this time, since the total pending storage number is “8”, the suggestion effect is ended (see FIG. 67). Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (A3), the display mode of the hold display 54A is changed to “character” and the display of the special background is started (see FIG. 67).

  Next, the character change in the production mode B will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 76 (B1), when all the hold displays including the hold display 54A are displayed in “white”, a new change is started and the suggestion effect 54B is started (FIG. 76). 69). A character change pattern is stored in the start winning command storage area corresponding to the hold display 54A. At this time, the player is informed by the mode display 54C that the effect mode B is controlled, and all the on-hold indications are displayed in “white” that is easy to change in the effect mode B. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the character change, and to promote the active launch of the game ball.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B2), a start winning is generated and a new hold display 54D is displayed. At this time, since the total pending storage number is “8”, the suggestion effect is ended (see FIG. 67). Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (B3), the display mode of the hold display 54A is changed to “character” and the display of the special background is started (see FIG. 67).

  As described above, according to the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of variable display, and includes information related to variable display (in this example, a big hit determination random number (random R), a big hit type determination) The random number for random use (random 1), the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2), and the random number for variation pattern determination (random 3)) are stored as reserved storage information (in this example, the first reserved memory). Buffer, second hold storage buffer) and hold display means for performing a hold display corresponding to the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means (in this example, the step of executing step S3510 in the production control microcomputer 100). Change means capable of changing the display mode of the hold display (in this example, steps S635 and S370 in the production control microcomputer 100). And the changing means is based on the fact that the specific number (8 in this example) of the reserved storage information is stored in the reserved storage means. )) Or the second mode (in this example, “blue” or “red”) that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the specific mode (in this example, “character”) (In this example, by performing step S3707, the production control microcomputer 100 changes from “white”, which is the first mode, or “blue” or “red”, which is the second mode. The display mode of the hold display can be changed to “character” which is a specific mode).

  In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the total number of pending storages is a specific number (eight) that “the specific number of pending storage information is stored in the pending storage means”, but is not limited thereto. The fact that at least one of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number becomes a specific number (for example, four) may be referred to as “a specific number of reserved memory information is stored in the reserved storage means”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the presence or absence of the character change in each hold display is determined at the time of the start winning (the change pattern including the information on the presence or absence of the character change is selected at the start winning), but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, when the total number of pending storage reaches a specific number (8), the pending storage satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, big hit hold, probability variable big hit hold, small hit hold, super reach hold) is stored Alternatively, the hold display corresponding to the hold storage may be changed to a specific mode at a predetermined rate (for example, 100%).

  Moreover, about the mode of a change of the display mode of a hold display, it is not restricted to what is predetermined. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not to change the display mode at a predetermined timing (for example, a hold display shift timing), and to change the display mode based on the determination result.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the character change can always be executed when the total number of reserved storage becomes a specific number (eight) when the hold display or the active display capable of changing the character is displayed. However, this is not a limitation. For example, even if the total number of reserved storage is a specific number (eight), a predetermined condition (for example, the display of the hold that is the target of the character change is displayed in a predetermined display mode, or the character change The character change execution may be restricted if the number of reserved storages (the number stored in the stored storage) is a predetermined value) is not satisfied. Specifically, even if the total number of reserved storage is a specific number (eight), the display mode of the reserved display that is the character change execution target is planned to change to “red” in the future. However, at present, the character change may not be executed when the color is “white” or “blue”. Moreover, even if the total number of reserved storages becomes eight immediately after the reserved storage, which is the character change execution target, is stored in the seventh (for example, before the display of the hold is shifted), the character change is not executed. Alternatively, the execution timing may be delayed to a predetermined timing (for example, a timing after the hold display is shifted twice). Further, for example, when the game state is controlled to a specific game state or a specific performance mode, the character change may not be executed even if the total number of reserved storage is eight.

  Further, if a character change is executed during execution of a specific effect (for example, reach effect), the effect of the specific effect may be reduced. Therefore, when the total pending storage number reaches a specific number (eight) during execution of a specific effect, the execution of character change may be restricted. For example, the restriction may be made by prohibiting the execution of the character change, or the restriction may be made by delaying the execution timing of the character change.

  In addition, as described above, according to the present embodiment, the hold display displayed according to the first mode (already displayed in the first mode (no change to the second mode), or Although the present state is not the first mode, it is a pending display scheduled to be changed to the first mode in the future.In this example, the display mode is “white” and the display mode is “blue” or “red” in the future. If the gaming machine is not used as the display mode after the change, as in the present embodiment, the “current status is the first” Although there is no “pending display scheduled to be changed to the first mode in the future although it is not one mode”, if the first mode is a gaming machine that is used as the display mode after the change, the current status is first. Although it is not a mode, the pending display scheduled to be changed to the first mode in the future Also, it is included in the “pending display displayed by the first mode”). The holding display displayed by the second mode (already displayed by the second mode) No change to the first mode), or a pending display that is not currently in the second mode but will be changed to the second mode in the future.In this example, the display mode is already “blue” or "Red" hold display, or hold display currently scheduled to change to "blue" or "red" in the future although the current state is "white" (change pattern type: second change pattern type to seventh change) (In this example, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the character change pattern in the first change pattern type as the change display pattern of the hold display in the production mode A). The character change patterns (PT2B, 3B, 4B, 5B, 6B, 7B) in the second change pattern type to the seventh change pattern type can be selected at a higher rate than PT1B) (see FIGS. 58 and 61). It was decided. As a result, the display mode can be changed to the specific mode when the number of reserved memories reaches the specific number, so that the effect can be improved. In addition, it is possible to promote the launch of a game ball for a player who expects a change to a specific mode, and to improve the operating rate of the game machine.

  That is, in the case of a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2006-2158) in which the display mode of the hold display changes according to the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start, Although the production effect was poor, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 76, the production effect can be improved as described above. Furthermore, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, according to the present embodiment, the hold display displayed according to the second mode (already displayed in the second mode (no planned change to the first mode), or A pending display that is not currently in the second mode but will be changed to the second mode in the future, in this example, a pending display in which the display mode is already "blue" or "red", or the current status is "white" However, the display mode is changed to “blue” or “red” in the future (change pattern type: second change pattern type to seventh change pattern type). Hold display displayed in one mode (already displayed in the first mode (no planned change to the second mode), or the current status is not the first mode but will be changed to the first mode in the future) In this example, the display mode is “white” Pending display in which the display mode will not change to “blue” or “red” in the future (change pattern type: first change pattern type) Note that, as in this embodiment, the first mode is the display mode after the change. If it is a gaming machine that is not used as a display, it is possible to change the display mode of “the current status is not the first mode but there is no pending display scheduled to be changed to the first mode in the future” to a specific mode. (In this example, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the character change patterns (PT2B, 3B, 4B, 5B, 6B, 2nd to 7th change pattern types) as the change pattern of the hold display in the production mode B. 7B), the character change pattern (PT1B) in the first change pattern type can be selected at a higher rate (see FIGS. 58 and 62). Thereby, the feeling of expectation with respect to the hold display of the first aspect can be enhanced, and a reduction in the effect of the presentation can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to promote the launch of a game ball for a player who expects a change to a specific mode, and to improve the operating rate of the game machine.

  That is, in the case of a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2006-2158) in which the display mode of the hold display changes according to the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start, Although the production effect was poor, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 76, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the production effect as described above. Furthermore, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, a single display mode (first mode: “white”, specific mode: “character”) is provided as the first mode and the specific mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a plurality of display modes may be provided as the first mode or the specific mode. In addition, a plurality of display modes (“blue” and “red”) are provided as the second mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a single display mode is provided as the second mode. It is good as well. Moreover, the display mode used as the first mode, the second mode, and the specific mode may be different for each effect mode.

  In the present embodiment, the first mode is not used as the display mode after the change (the change pattern that changes from other display modes to “white” is not provided). It is not a thing. For example, the display mode other than the first mode may be changed to the first mode.

  In the present embodiment, the “specific number” is the upper limit number (8) of the total pending storage number, but is not limited to this, and may be an arbitrary number.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the character change pattern can be selected only when the winning determination result is a probable big hit, it is determined that the probable big hit is determined when a character change occurs. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the character may be changeable even in the case of a normal big hit, sudden probability change big hit or small hit. Moreover, even if it is not a big hit or a small hit, for example, the character change may be executed even with the hold display for the hold storage that is out of super reach.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the specific mode is more advantageous for the player than the second mode (in this example, the “character” is more reliable for the big hit than “blue” or “red”. High). Thereby, the expectation with respect to the hold display of a specific aspect can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the changing means displays a high percentage of the hold display corresponding to the hold storage information stored in the predetermined number (in this example, the sixth and seventh) approximate to the specific number. (In this example, in the production mode A, the microcomputer 100 for production control includes a change timing pattern (T06, T07, T60˜) including “6th” and “7th” as the change timing. By determining T76) at a higher rate than the other change timing patterns (T00 to T05, T10 to T54), the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the sixth or seventh piece is set. 64 (A) and 65. If the gaming machine uses the first mode as the display mode after the change, display is started in another display mode. Pending table By selecting a change timing pattern including “sixth” and “seventh” as a change timing at a low rate, a display mode of a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the sixth or seventh May be changed to the first mode at a high rate). As a result, it is possible to promote the accumulation of the reserved memory up to a predetermined number that is close to the specific number, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the changing means displays a high percentage of the hold display corresponding to the hold storage information stored in the predetermined number (in this example, the sixth and seventh) approximate to the specific number. (In this example, in the production mode A, in the production mode A, the microcomputer 100 for production control includes a change timing pattern (T06, including “6th” and “7th”) as the change timing. T07, T60 to T76) are determined at a higher rate than the other change timing patterns (T00 to T05, T10 to T54), so that the hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the sixth or seventh piece The display mode can be changed to the second mode at a high rate, as shown in Fig. 64 (A) and Fig. 65. If the gaming machine does not use the second mode as the display mode after the change, the second mode is changed. Open the display. By selecting a change timing pattern including “sixth” or “seventh” at a low rate as the change timing of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the sixth or seventh is displayed. Can be displayed at a high rate by the second mode.). For example, as described above, in the production mode A, since the rate of character change from “blue” or “red” is higher than the rate of change of character from “white”, it is stored in the 6th and 7th. By making it easy to display the hold display corresponding to the hold memory that is currently held in “blue” or “red”, the player is given a sense of expectation that character changes will occur by accumulating the remaining few hold memories. It is possible to promote aggressive games and improve the operating rate of gaming machines.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the changing means displays a high percentage of the hold display corresponding to the hold storage information stored in the predetermined number (in this example, the sixth and seventh) approximate to the specific number. (In this example, in the production mode B, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the change timing pattern (T06, including “6th” and “7th”) as the change timing in the production mode B. T07, T60 to T76) are determined at a lower rate than the other change timing patterns (T00 to T05, T10 to T54), so that the hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the sixth or seventh hold 64 (B) and 66. If the gaming machine uses the first mode as the display mode after the change, other tables in effect mode B can be displayed. By selecting a change timing pattern including “sixth” and “seventh” at a high rate as the change timing of the hold display that has started display in the mode, the hold stored in the sixth or seventh is stored The hold display corresponding to the memory may be changed to the first mode at a high rate). For example, as described above, in the production mode B, since the rate of character change from “white” is higher than the rate of change of character from “blue” or “red”, it is stored in the 6th or 7th. By making it easier to display the hold display corresponding to the hold memory being “white”, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that character change will occur by accumulating the remaining few hold memories, Aggressive gaming can be promoted, and the operating rate of gaming machines can be improved.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the suggestion effect execution means (in this example, the step in the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the suggestion effect suggesting that the hold storage information that can be changed to the specific mode is stored. A portion for executing S8002D). Thereby, the willingness to launch the game ball can be improved, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, even if the pending storage information that can change to the specific mode is not stored, the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the expectation for changing to the specific mode and the anxiety about not changing Can be given to the player after the start of the suggestion production, and the interest is improved. In addition, it is good also as a suggestion effect being executable only when the pending | holding memory | storage information which can change to a specific aspect is memorize | stored.

  In addition, when there is a large number of reserved memories, it is easier to accumulate up to eight reserved memories, so that it is easier to achieve a suggestive effect effect (improvement of willingness to play game balls). Therefore, it may be configured such that the suggestion effect is easier to execute when the total number of pending storages is smaller than when the total number of pending storages is small. As a result, the effect of the suggestion effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the changing unit can change the display mode of the hold display to the specific mode only when the specific number of hold storage information is stored in the hold storage unit (in this example, the rendering The control microcomputer 100 can execute step S3707 only when Y in step S3701). Thereby, since the rarity of a specific aspect improves, the operation rate of a game machine can be improved more.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, a specific number of reserved storage information is stored in the storage device, and a special effect (in this example, a special background is displayed in response to the display mode of the hold display being changed to the specific mode). Special effect execution means (in this example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, when Y is step S3701 and step S3707 is executed in the effect control microcomputer 100), a step S3709 is executed. did. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the changing means can change the display mode of the hold display displayed according to the first mode to the second mode (in this example, the production control microcomputer 100 has a change pattern. If any of PT2A, 2B, 4A, 4B, 5A, 5B is selected, the display mode of the hold display is changed from “white” to “blue” or “red” by executing step S635. It is possible to make it possible. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  Further, as described above, according to the present embodiment, the changing means has a specific timing (in this example, “active”, “first”, “second”, “third”, “ 4th "," 5th "," 6th "," 7th ")), the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first mode (" white "in this example) is the first mode. When it is determined to change to the second mode (in this example, “blue” or “red”) that is more advantageous to the player than the mode (in this example, the second change pattern type, the fourth change pattern type) Or when a change pattern corresponding to any of the fifth change pattern types is determined and any of the change timing patterns is determined), a specific number (8 in this example) is stored in the holding storage means. Based on the fact that the stored information is stored) At a different special timing (in this example, the timing when the total number of reserved storage becomes “8”), the display mode of the hold display displayed by the first mode is more advantageous to the player than the second mode. (In this example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes step S3707 when Y in step S3701 so that the change timing has not yet been reached. When the total reserved memory number becomes “8”, it can be changed from “white” to “character” at the timing when the total reserved memory number becomes “8”). Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the changing unit changes the display mode of the hold display displayed by the second mode to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific number of the hold storage information is stored in the hold storage unit. (In this example, the production control microcomputer 100 determines Y in step S3701 when a change pattern corresponding to any one of the second change pattern type to the seventh change pattern type is determined. In some cases, the display mode of the hold display can be changed from “blue” or “red” to “character” by executing step S3707. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the change pattern and the change timing pattern are respectively determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of a plurality of hold control pattern data whose change mode and change timing are predetermined. May be selected.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of active display can be changed to a specific mode (character change is possible), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the display mode of the hold display may be changed to the specific mode. Further, the active display itself may not be performed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the several 2nd start winning opening 14,17 was provided, it is good also as a single 2nd starting winning opening being provided. Further, the sorting apparatus 200 may not be provided.

  Moreover, the 1st effect device and the 2nd effect device, the specific display means which can display a specific display (for example, hold display, active display) using the 1st effect device, and the change which can change the display mode of a specific display A change effect executing means capable of executing an effect, wherein the change effect executing means uses the first effect device to change the display mode of the specific display, the first effect device, and the second effect device. Can be executed with the second change effect that can change the display mode of the specific display, and either the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display has changed. The degree of expectation may be different depending on the situation. Specifically, this will be described using the following fifth embodiment. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the same location as 4th Embodiment mentioned above.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 77 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment as viewed from the front. In the fifth embodiment, below the effect display device 9 described above, a sub display device 9S configured with a liquid crystal display device (LCD) having a smaller size than the liquid crystal display device (LCD) constituting the effect display device 9 is provided. Is provided. The display screen of the sub display device 9S is provided with an area (total pending storage display unit) 18c for displaying the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. Yes. In the fifth embodiment, the total pending storage display unit 18c that displays the total number is provided, so that it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the variable display start condition. . In addition, it replaces with the total pending | holding memory | storage display part 18c, and it comprises so that the 1st pending | holding memory display part which displays the 1st pending | holding memory number, and the 2nd pending memory display part which displays the 2nd pending memory number may be provided. Also good.

  In addition, the display screen of the sub display device 9S is provided with an active display area 9A (similar to the active display unit 18d in the fourth embodiment described above) in which a predetermined display corresponding to the currently executed variable display is displayed. It has been.

  In the fifth embodiment, a hold change notice effect can be executed as the prefetch notice effect. The hold change notice effect is an effect of changing the hold display to a special display mode (in this example, blue or red round display) different from the normal mode (in this example, black round display). In the present embodiment, when the hold change notice effect is executed, the display of the hold display is started in the normal mode at the timing when the start winning is generated, and then the action effect (the action effect described later) at the timing of the hold display shift. (A or action effect B) is executed, and the effect that the hold display to be notified changes to any special display mode is executed (therefore, in this embodiment, at least the action effect is included in the hold change notice effect). Both the part to be executed and the part to change the hold display for the notice target). If the display mode of the hold display is changed after the hold change notice effect is executed, the hold storage of the notice target is digested at the timing when the variable display of the notice target is subsequently started, and the special display mode of the notice target is displayed. While the hold display is erased, the special display mode active display is displayed in the active display area 9A. When the variable display to be notified is finished, the active display in the special display mode is deleted. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the hold change notice effect is executed, the display of the special display mode (hold display, active display) is continued until the variable display of the notice target is finished.

  In this embodiment, when a start winning occurs, the effect control CPU 101 uses the hold change notice effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the hold change notice effect in the hold display control process (step S800A). Thus, a lottery process based on a random number is performed to determine the presence and type of a pending change notice effect. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 executes the set hold change notice effect in the effect symbol fluctuation start process (step S801).

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the hold change notice effect determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 78, in the fifth embodiment, determination values are assigned to the hold change notice effect 1 to 6 in the hold change notice effect determination table without hold change notice effect. As shown in FIG. 78, in this embodiment, there are six types of hold change notice effects 1 to 6 as hold change notice effects.

  The hold change notice effect 1 does not change the display mode of the hold display in the normal form (in this example, a black round display) only by executing the action effect A at the timing of the hold display shift. It is. In addition, the hold change notice effect 2 only performs the action effect B at the timing of the hold display shift, and does not change the hold display display mode in the normal mode (in this example, black round display). This is a notice effect. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when the hold change notice effect 1 or the hold change notice effect 2 is executed, only the action effect (action effect A or action effect B) is executed, and the display mode of the hold display is changed. Since it does not change, it corresponds to the so-called Gase hold change notice effect.

  The hold change notice effect 3 is a hold change notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display to a blue round display while executing the action effect A at the timing of the hold display shift. The hold change notice effect 4 is a hold change notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display to a blue round display while executing the action effect B at the timing of the hold display shift. The hold change notice effect 5 is a hold change notice effect that executes the action effect A at the timing of the hold display shift and changes the display mode of the hold display to a red round display. The hold change notice effect 6 is a hold change notice effect that executes the action effect B at the timing of the hold display shift and changes the display mode of the hold display to a red round display.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the fifth embodiment, there are two types of action effects A and action effects B that are executed in the hold change notice effect. The action effect A is an action effect performed using only the sub display device 9S (sub display device). The action effect B is an action effect performed using the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device). In addition, when performing the effect, it is not performed using only the liquid crystal display device. For example, a predetermined change sound is output from the speaker at the timing when the hold display or the active display is changed, or a lamp or LED is emitted. For example, it may be accompanied by an effect by another effect device.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the fifth embodiment, when the determination result indicated by the variation category command is non-reach deviation or when the super reach is deviation, the determination result indicated by the variation category command is a super reach big hit. In some cases, execution of the pending change notice effect may be determined.

  In the present embodiment, the hold change notice effect is an effect that can change the display mode of the hold display using the sub display device 9S (in this example, the hold change notice effect 1 with the action effect A, the hold change notice effect 3, And the hold change notice effect 5. Hereinafter, the effect that the display mode of the hold display can be changed by the manner in which the effect display device 9 and the sub display device 9S are interlocked with each other (also referred to as the first hold change notice effect in this example) (in this example). 78, the hold change notice effect 2 with the action effect B, the hold change notice effect 4, and the hold change notice effect 6. Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a second hold change notice effect). As described above, when the super reach big hit is achieved, the ratio of the second hold change notice effect is relatively higher than the ratio of the first hold change notice effect. In addition, as shown in FIG. 78, when the non-reach shift or the super reach shift occurs, the ratio at which the second hold change notice effect is relatively executed is higher than the ratio at which the first hold change notice effect is executed. It is low. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed. As a result, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is high.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the change mode of the display mode of the hold display includes a case where the hold display to be notified changes to a blue round display and a case where the display changes to a red round display. As shown in FIG. 78, when the first hold change notice effect is executed, the ratio of changing to a blue round display is relatively higher than the ratio of changing to a red round display. In addition, as shown in FIG. 78, when the second hold change notice effect is executed, the rate of change to the red round display is relatively higher than the rate of change to the blue round display. Yes. Therefore, in this embodiment, the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a blue circle depending on whether the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes. And the display mode of the red round display are different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display does not change even if the hold change notice effect is executed (that is, the gas change hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 1, hold change notice effect 2) is executed. If). In addition, as shown in FIG. 78, the ratio at which the first hold change notice effect of Gasse (in this example, hold change notice effect 1) is executed is higher than the second hold change notice effect of Gase (in this example, It is higher than the rate at which the hold change notice effect 2) is executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display of the notice target varies depending on whether the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the second hold change notice effect of Gase (in this example, hold change notice effect 2) is the first hold change notice effect of Gase (in this example, hold change notice effect 1). ) Is lower than that in the case where the second hold change notice effect is executed relatively than the case where the first hold change notice effect is executed. high. In addition, not only in the aspect shown in the present embodiment, on the contrary, when the first hold change notice effect is executed, the hold of the notice target is relatively more than when the second hold change notice effect is executed. You may comprise so that the ratio which a display changes may become high.

  Note that the method of allocating the determination of the pending change notice effect is not limited to that shown in the present embodiment. For example, when it is configured so that there is a case where it is possible to recognize which hold display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is the subject of notice in the stage before the change of the hold indication, and a case where it cannot be recognized, The execution of the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether the hold display can be recognized or not. In this case, for example, a hold display in a display mode (for example, a white round display) that is different from the normal mode but different from the final change mode (in this example, blue or red round display) in the hold change notice effect. In addition, when a hold display (so-called white hold display) that suggests that the display mode is changed is configured to be displayable, any hold display is notified depending on whether or not the white hold display is displayed. We can infer whether it can be targeted. Therefore, the execution of the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the white hold display is displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the display mode of the hold display is changed only once in the hold change notice effect is shown, but the display mode of the hold display may be configured to be changed a plurality of times (further active It may be configured to be able to change multiple times including after the display.) In this case, it may be configured to collectively determine the number of times of change, the change pattern at which each timing, and the display mode (color, etc.). Also, for example, in the case of a configuration that can be changed a plurality of times including after the active display, the change pattern including the change after the active display is collectively determined in the pending change notice effect determination process. Alternatively, only the change pattern of the hold display is determined in the hold change notice effect determination process, and the change pattern after the active display is determined is determined by the effect symbol change start process at the start of change. May be.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where an effect effect is always performed in the hold change notice effect is shown, the display mode of a hold display may change without performing the effect effect, without being limited to such an aspect. You may comprise. In addition, in the case where a hold change notice effect without such an effect is executed, and when the display mode of the hold display (including the active display) may be changed a plurality of times as described above, You may comprise so that the effect presentation may be performed at the timing of the change timing of multiple times, and the number of executions of the effect presentation may be determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the action effect B is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the action effect A is executed, or the so-called gusset hold change notice is made. Although the case where the degree of advantage is high, such as a small proportion of production, is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, conversely, when the effect effect B is executed, the advantage degree may be lower than when the effect effect A is executed.

  Next, a specific example of the production mode of the pending change notice effect will be described. FIG. 79 and FIG. 80 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the effect aspect of the pending change notice effect in the fifth embodiment. Among these, FIG. 79 shows a specific example of the production mode of the first hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 1, hold change notice effect 3, hold change notice effect 5). FIG. 80 shows a specific example of the production mode of the second hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 2, hold change notice effect 4, hold change notice effect 6). 79 and 80, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  First, with reference to FIG. 79, an effect mode of the first reserved change notice effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 79 (1), it is assumed that the effect display device 9 (main display device) is performing variable display of the middle left and right effect symbols, and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) is active display. In the area 9A, a predetermined display (active display) is displayed corresponding to the variable display during the current execution, and two hold displays are displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c (that is, two hold memories are displayed). Have accumulated). Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (2), it is assumed that a new start prize is generated, and the number of on-hold displays is increased by one in the total on-hold storage display unit 18c to three. Further, it is assumed that the first hold change notice effect is determined to be executed based on the occurrence of a new start prize. In the example shown in FIG. 79, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the hold change notice effect 3 or the hold change notice effect 5. Then, it is assumed that the variable display is ended as shown in FIG. 79 (3), one holding storage is consumed, and the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 79 (4). Further, as shown in FIG. 79 (4), it is assumed that the reserved display is decreased by one in the total reserved storage display unit 18c and becomes two by digesting one reserved memory.

  Next, when the start timing of the action effect A is reached (for example, 1 second after the start of fluctuation), the action effect A is started in the sub display device 9S (sub display device) as shown in FIG. 79 (4). In this example, as shown in FIG. 79 (4), as an effect A, an arrow 240 flies in the direction of the active display area 9A and the summed hold storage display unit 18c in the sub display device 9S (sub display device). Various effects are executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (5), the combined hold storage display unit 18c executes an effect in a manner that the arrow 240 hits the hold display to be notified.

  Then, at the end timing of the action effect A (for example, 6 seconds after the start of fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 79 (6), the action effect A is ended in the sub display device 9S (sub display device), The display mode of the hold display is changed. For example, if the hold change notice effect 3 is executed, the notice target hold display is changed to a blue round display in FIG. 79 (6), and if the hold change notice effect 5 is executed, In 79 (6), the hold display to be notified is changed to a red round display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 79, the case where the hold change notice effect 3 or the hold change notice effect 5 is executed as the first hold change notice effect is shown. 79 (4) and (5), only the effect A is executed. In FIG. 79 (6), the hold display changes in the normal mode (in this example, black round display). It will not (so-called Gase's first pending change notice effect). In this case, for example, an effect may be executed such that the arrow does not hit due to warping the hold display although the effect is such that the arrow flies in the same manner as in FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, an effect aspect of the second reserved change notice effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 80 (1), the effect display device 9 (main display device) performs variable display of the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) performs active display. In the area 9A, a predetermined display (active display) is displayed corresponding to the variable display during the current execution, and two hold displays are displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c (that is, two hold memories are displayed). Have accumulated). Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (2), it is assumed that a new start prize is generated and the number of on-hold displays is increased by one in the total on-hold storage display unit 18c to be three. Further, it is assumed that the second hold change notice effect is decided to be executed based on the occurrence of a new start prize. In the example shown in FIG. 80, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the hold change notice effect 4 or the hold change notice effect 6. Then, it is assumed that the variable display is ended as shown in FIG. 80 (3), one reserved storage is consumed, and the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 80 (4). Further, as shown in FIG. 80 (4), it is assumed that the hold display is reduced by one in the total hold storage display unit 18c and becomes two by digesting one hold storage.

  Next, at the start timing of the action effect B (for example, 1 second after the start of fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 80 (4), the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) are displayed. The used effect B is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 80 (4), as the effect effect B, the effect display is directed toward the active display area 9A of the sub display device 9S (sub display device) and the summed hold storage display unit 18c. In the device 9 (main display device), an effect in which the arrow 241 flies is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (5), the arrow 241 jumps from the effect display device 9 (main display device) to the sub display device 9S (sub display device), and the sub display device 9S (sub display). In the total hold storage display unit 18c of the device, an effect is performed in such a manner that the arrow 241 hits the hold display to be notified.

  Then, at the end timing of the action effect B (for example, 6 seconds after the start of fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 80 (6), the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) are displayed. The used effect presentation B is ended, and the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed. For example, if the hold change notice effect 4 is executed, the hold display to be notified in FIG. 80 (6) is changed to a blue round display, and if the hold change notice effect 6 is executed, In 80 (6), the hold display to be notified is changed to a red round display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 80, the case where the hold change notice effect 4 or the hold change notice effect 6 is executed as the second hold change notice effect is shown. 80 (4) and (5) are simply performed in the same manner as in FIGS. 80 (4) and (5). In FIG. 80 (6), the hold display changes in the normal mode (in this example, a black round display). No (this is the so-called second hold change notice effect of Gase). In this case, for example, an effect such that the arrow flies in the same manner as in FIG. 80 may be performed so that the arrow is not hit by warping the hold display.

  As described above, according to the fifth embodiment, the first effect device (in this example, the sub display device 9S (sub display device)) and the second effect device (in this example, the effect display device 9 (main display). Display device)), and can display a specific display (in this example, a hold display) using the first effect device (in this example, the secondary display device 9S has a combined hold storage display unit 18c). A change effect that can change the display mode of the display (in this example, a pending change notice effect) can be executed. In this case, the first change effect that can change the display mode of the specific display using the first effect device (in this example, the first hold change notice effect (the hold change notice effect 1 with the action effect A, the hold change notice effect) 3, the hold change notice effect 5)) and the second change effect (in this example, the second hold change notice in which the display form of the specific display can be changed in a manner in which the first effect device and the second effect device are linked. Effects (holding change notice effect 2 with action effects B, hold change notice effect 4, hold change notice effect 6)) can be executed. Then, the degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display changes (in this example, as shown in FIG. 78, the second pending change notice When an effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the advantage (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed. high). Therefore, the effect of changing effects can be improved by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of changing effects. In addition, since the degree of expectation varies depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the hold display is described as “specific display”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the corresponding display (active display) corresponding to the variable display may be “specific display”. Specifically, a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display (for example, an active display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed) can be displayed using the first effect device during the execution of the variable display (for example, the secondary display). There is an active display area in which the active display is displayed on the display device 9S), and a change effect that can change the display mode of the corresponding display (for example, the active display is a special display different from the normal mode (for example, black round display)) A first change effect (for example, an active display change notice effect for changing to a blue or red round display) can be executed, and the display mode of the corresponding display can be changed using the first effect device (for example, The first active display change notice effect) that can change the display mode of the active display using the sub display device 9S, and the correspondence table according to the mode in which the first effect device and the second effect device are linked. The second change effect (for example, the second active display change notice effect that can change the display mode of the active display according to the mode in which the effect display device 9 and the sub display device 9S are linked) is executed. The degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the display mode of the corresponding display changes (for example, the second active display change notice effect is executed and activated) When the display mode of the display changes, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the first active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the active display changes) Good. Therefore, the effect of changing effects can be improved by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of changing effects. In addition, since the degree of expectation varies depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, both the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect can be executed as change effects (however, in one variable display, the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect are duplicated) The game machine is configured so that only one of the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect can be executed as the change effect (the other effect is not executed at all). May be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the game state, the production state, and various setting states in the gaming machine are in a specific state, only one of the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect is executed. In the state different from the specific state, the other effect may be executed. Moreover, in a further different state, you may comprise so that both an on-hold change notice effect and an active display change notice effect may be performed, and various structure aspects can be considered.

  In the present embodiment, the first effect device is the sub display device 9S (sub display device) and the second effect device is the effect display device 9 (main display device). The second effect device is not limited to such a liquid crystal display device. For example, the first effect device or the second effect device may be configured with a movable member (effect effect) that can move. Further, for example, the liquid crystal display device may be configured to be movable, and the first effect device and the second effect device may be configured by the liquid crystal display device configured to be movable. Furthermore, not only a liquid crystal display device and a movable member (production effect), but also a light emitter such as a lamp or LED, or a sound output device such as a speaker may be used as the effect device.

  In the present embodiment, the case where two effect devices, that is, the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) are used has been described. You may comprise so that a pending | holding change notice effect and an active display change notice effect can be performed using an apparatus.

  As an example using three effect devices, for example, an effect effect may be executed using three liquid crystal display devices. In this case, for example, the first liquid crystal display device is configured to be movable, the arrow is displayed while moving the first liquid crystal display device, and the arrow passes through the main display device to display the sub-display. You may comprise so that an effect effect may be performed in the aspect which flies toward the active display of an apparatus, and a hold display.

  Further, for example, as the three effect devices, an effect effect may be configured to be executable using a liquid crystal display device, an LED, and an effect accessory. In this case, for example, when the stage effect is movable, the LEDs emit light sequentially from the LED located in the vicinity of the moved stage effect, and when the light reaches the LED located in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device, You may comprise so that an effect presentation may be performed in the aspect from which the display mode of the active display on a display screen of a liquid crystal display device or a hold display changes.

  In addition, when the action effect is configured to be executable using three or more effect devices as described above, the degree of advantage increases as the effect effect is executed in conjunction with a larger number of effect devices (for example, It may be configured such that the ratio of producing the effect is reduced or changes to an advantageous change mode). On the contrary, you may comprise so that an advantage degree may become low as a larger number of production | presentation apparatuses interlock | cooperate and an effect production is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “the second change effect capable of changing the display mode of the corresponding display by the mode in which the first effect device and the second effect device are linked” means the first effect device and the second effect device. Is to execute the second change effect by acting in some manner. For example, “a second change effect in which the display mode of the corresponding display can be changed by a mode in which the first effect device and the second effect device are interlocked” means an effect display device 9 (main display) as shown in FIG. On the display screen of the device, an image such as an arrow is displayed so as to fly toward the sub display device 9S (sub display device) that displays the hold display and the active display. Such an effect display may be performed. In addition, for example, in the case where it is configured so as to include an effect item instead of the main display device, the effect item moves so as to move toward the hold display or the active display so that it acts by a physical operation. It may be shown.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of display modes in which the hold display can be changed (for example, a blue round display and a red round display), and either the first change effect or the second change effect is executed. Depending on whether the display mode of the hold display has changed, the ratio of the display mode to which the hold display changes varies (for example, which one of the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect is executed) Depending on whether the display mode of the hold display has changed, the ratio of whether the hold display to be notified changes to a blue round display or a red round display may be different). Therefore, since the change mode varies depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  There are a plurality of display modes in which the corresponding display can be changed (for example, a blue round display and a red round display), and either the first change effect or the second change effect is executed to display the corresponding display mode. Depending on whether the corresponding display changes, the ratio of which display mode changes is different (for example, the first active display change notice effect or the second active display change notice effect is executed and the active display Depending on whether the display mode has changed, the ratio of whether the active display changes to a blue round display or a red round display may be different). Therefore, since the change mode varies depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display does not change even if the change effect is executed (for example, when the hold change notice effect (the hold change notice effect 1 and the hold change notice effect 2) is executed). ), And the rate of change of the display mode of the hold display varies depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed (for example, the second hold change notice effect is executed relatively). It is also possible that the rate of change of the hold display of the notice target is higher than the case where the first hold change notice effect is executed). Therefore, since the rate at which the display mode of the hold display changes varies depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  In addition, there is a case where the display mode of the corresponding display does not change even when the change effect is executed (for example, the case where the active display change notice effect is executed), and either the first change effect or the second change effect is executed. Depending on whether or not the display mode of the corresponding display changes, the rate of change of the display mode of the corresponding display varies (for example, the first active display change notice effect is executed when the second active display change notice effect is relatively executed) It is also possible that the rate at which the active display changes is higher than the case). Therefore, since the rate at which the display mode of the corresponding display changes varies depending on which change effect is executed, it is possible to make the player interested in which change effect is executed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when a 2nd change production is performed and a display mode changes, expectation becomes high compared with the case where a 1st change production is performed and a display mode changes (for example, When the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the degree of expectation for the big hit is compared with the case where the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed. When the second active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the first active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed. Compared to the case, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is high.) Therefore, the player's expectation can be improved by executing the second change effect.

  When the second hold change notice effect or the second active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display or active display changes, the first hold change notice effect or the first active display change notice effect is executed. Compared with the case where the display mode of the hold display or active display is changed, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit may be higher, and conversely, the first hold change notice effect or the first active display. When a change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display or active display changes, the second hold change notice effect or the second active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display or active display changes. Compared to the case, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the second hold change notice effect or the second active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed, the big hit expectation may be higher. However, not only the big hit expectation degree, for example, the expectation degree for the probability variation big hit, the reach expectation degree, and the expectation degree for the occurrence of the pseudo-ream may be increased. In addition, for example, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the hold display or active display changes, and when there are a plurality of types of change modes, the degree of expectation as to whether the hold display or active display changes will be increased. May be.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the second effect device is the main display device (in this example, the effect display device 9 (main display device)), and the first effect device is the sub-display device (in this example, Sub-display device 9S (sub-display device). Therefore, the effect of changing effects can be improved by using the main display device and the sub display device.

  Further, a common change effect can be executed when the display mode of the hold display is changed and when the display mode of the corresponding display is changed (for example, the first hold change notice effect is executed as shown in FIG. 79). And the case where the first active display change notice effect is executed, the effect effect A is executed in the same effect manner, as shown in Fig. 80, and the case where the second hold change notice effect is executed. In the case of executing the second active display change notice effect, the action effect B is executed in the same effect manner, but strictly speaking, an arrow hits depending on which hold display or active display is the subject of the notice. Since the destinations are different, some of the productions are common.) Therefore, it can be noted which of the hold display and the corresponding display changes, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the action effect A executed when the first hold change notice effect is executed and when the first active display change notice effect is executed, and when the second hold change notice effect is executed. Both the action effect B executed in the second active display change notice effect may be executed in the same effect mode, or only one of them may be executed in the same mode. Also good. For example, when the first hold change notice effect is executed and when the first active display change notice effect is executed, the action effect A is executed in the same effect mode, while the second hold change notice effect is executed. And the second active display change notice effect may be configured to execute an effect effect B having a different effect mode. On the other hand, for example, when the second hold change notice effect is executed and when the second active display change notice effect is executed, the action effect B is executed in the same effect manner, while the first hold change notice is executed. You may comprise so that the effect production A of the production aspect different in the case where an effect may be performed and a 1st active display change notice effect may be performed.

  Moreover, it is good also considering the total number of pending storages as a specific number (for example, 8) as an execution condition for the effect. In that case, if the gaming machine is capable of executing a character change when the total number of reserved storage is a specific number (for example, 8), the time when the character change is executed is higher than the time when the character change is not executed. It is good also as performing the effect production B in a ratio. Thereby, the improvement of interest can be aimed at.

  As mentioned above, although each embodiment of 1st Embodiment-5th Embodiment was demonstrated using FIGS. 1-80, about the structure shown in said each embodiment, only one structure is only a pachinko game machine. 1 may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by combining some or all of the above-described embodiments.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the contents of the first to third embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 22 and the contents of the fourth and fifth embodiments described with reference to FIGS. And an embodiment in which That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment is characterized by the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment (or the second embodiment or the third embodiment) and the fourth embodiment (or the fifth embodiment). This is a gaming machine that combines the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment performs the effects (such as the suggestion effect, the hold change notice effect, the active display change notice effect, etc.) as shown in FIGS. 76, 79, and 80 during variable display. In the advantageous state, effects (various notification effects) as shown in FIGS. 12, 19, and 20 can be executed.

(1) For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and has a plurality of types with different advantageous degrees. The above-mentioned advantageous states (15R probability variation big hit, 15R probability variation big hit, 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, etc.) and the notification effect related to the number of game media (number of game balls etc.) given during the advantageous state (Fig. Notification effect means (the effect control microcomputer 100, etc.) for executing the first notification image 213 shown in FIG. 12 and information relating to variable display (for example, a big hit determination random number (random R), a big hit type determination) A random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3)) are stored as pending storage information. Retention storage means (for example, a first reservation storage buffer, a second reservation storage buffer, etc.) and a hold display means (for example, an effect control microcomputer) that performs a hold display corresponding to the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means And a change means capable of changing the display mode of the hold display (for example, a portion executing steps S635 and S3707 in the production control microcomputer 100). The changing means is based on the fact that a specific number (for example, 8) of the reserved storage information is stored in the reserved storage means, and the game is more effective than the first mode (for example, “white”) or the first mode. The display mode of the hold display displayed by the second mode (for example, “blue”, “red”, etc.) advantageous to the user is specified (for example, “character character”). (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the step S3707 from the “white” that is the first mode, or “blue” or “red” that is the second mode). The display mode of the hold display can be changed to the “character” which is a specific mode), the hold display displayed by the first mode (already displayed in the first mode (scheduled change to the second mode) None), or a pending display that is not currently in the first mode but will be changed to the first mode in the future, for example, the display mode is “white” and the display mode is “blue” in the future. "Pending display that does not change to" red "(change pattern type: first change pattern type) If the first mode is a gaming machine that is not used as the display mode after the change, It is not a mode, but it will There is no “pending display scheduled to be changed to a mode”. ) At a higher rate than that of the second mode (they are already displayed in the second mode (no planned change to the first mode)), or the current status is not the second mode. Is a pending display scheduled to be changed to the second mode in the future, for example, a pending display whose display mode is already “blue” or “red”, or is currently “white” but has a display mode in the future. The display mode of the pending display (change pattern type: second change pattern type to seventh change pattern type) scheduled to change to “blue” or “red” can be changed to the specific mode (for example, production control) The microcomputer 100 uses the second change pattern type to the seventh change pattern as the change pattern of the hold display in the effect mode A at a higher rate than the character change pattern (PT1B) in the first change pattern type. Character change patterns (PT2B, 3B, 4B, 5B, 6B, and 7B) can be selected for each type (see FIGS. 58 and 61), and the notification effect means is such that the advantageous state is the first advantageous state (15R probability variation). The notification effect is executed when controlled to a big hit etc., but the notification effect is not executed when controlled to a second advantageous state (5R normal big hit etc.) different from the first advantageous state, It may be a gaming machine.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of (1), it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state. For example, in the case of a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Patent Document 1) that displays an image indicating the number of acquired balls every time the number of acquired balls in a big hit becomes a predetermined number, the mode of notification effect is Although the game is in a uniform and advantageous state during the advantageous state, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, an effect according to the type of the advantageous state is executed. Interest can be improved. In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-described configuration, it is possible to improve the production effect due to the hold display or the like. For example, unlike a gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2006-2158) that changes the display mode of the hold display according to a change pattern determined at the time of starting winning, the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above Since the display mode of the hold display and the active display can be changed based on the total number of stored memories being eight, which is a specific number (see FIG. 67), the production effect by the hold display is improved. To do. In addition, a player who expects a change in the display mode of the hold display or the active display will continue to launch game balls so that the total hold memory number becomes a specific number (even if the total hold memory number increases to some extent). Since the stop for the purpose of digestion is not performed), the substantial operation of the gaming machine (launching of the game ball) is promoted.

(2) Further, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and has a plurality of different advantageous degrees There are various kinds of advantageous states (15R probability variation big hit, 15R probability variation big hit, 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, etc.), and a notification effect related to the number of game media (number of game balls, etc.) given in the advantageous state ( Notification effect means (execution control microcomputer 100, etc.) for executing the notification effect by the first notification image 213 shown in FIG. 12, information related to variable display (for example, a big hit determination random number (random R), and a jackpot type determination) Random number for random use (random 1), random number for determining variation pattern type (random 2) and random number for determining variation pattern (random 3)) are stored as pending storage information Holding storage means (for example, a first holding storage buffer, a second holding storage buffer, etc.) and a holding display means for performing holding display corresponding to the holding storage information stored in the holding storage means (for example, effect control micro) A part for executing step S3510 in the computer 100) and a changing means capable of changing the display mode of the hold display (for example, a part for executing steps S635 and S3707 in the production control microcomputer 100). The changing means is based on the fact that a specific number (for example, 8) of reserved storage information is stored in the reserved storage means, and the change means is more effective than the first aspect (for example, “white” etc.) or the first aspect. The display mode of the hold display displayed by the second mode (for example, “blue”, “red”, etc.) advantageous to the player is specified in a specific mode (for example, “ (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes step S3707 to thereby execute “white” as the first mode, or “blue” or “red” as the second mode. From the above, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold display to the “character” which is the specific mode), the hold display displayed by the first mode (already displayed in the first mode (change to the second mode) There is no schedule), or the current status is not the first mode, but the display is scheduled to be changed to the first mode in the future, for example, the display mode is “white” and the display mode is “ Pending display that does not change to “blue” or “red” (change pattern type: first change pattern type) If the gaming machine is not used as the display mode after the change, Not one aspect but in the future There is no “pending display scheduled to be changed to the first mode”. ) At a higher rate than that of the second mode (they are already displayed in the second mode (no planned change to the first mode)), or the current status is not the second mode. Is a pending display scheduled to be changed to the second mode in the future, for example, a pending display whose display mode is already “blue” or “red”, or is currently “white” but has a display mode in the future. The display mode of the pending display (change pattern type: second change pattern type to seventh change pattern type) scheduled to change to “blue” or “red” can be changed to the specific mode (for example, production control) The microcomputer 100 uses the second change pattern type to the seventh change pattern as the change pattern of the hold display in the effect mode A at a higher rate than the character change pattern (PT1B) in the first change pattern type. Character change patterns (PT2B, 3B, 4B, 5B, 6B, and 7B) can be selected for each type. See FIGS. 58 and 61.) The notification effect means is such that the advantageous state is the first advantageous state (15R probability variation big hit). Etc.), the notification effect in the first notification mode is executed. When the control is in the second advantageous state (5R normal big hit etc.) different from the first advantageous state, the first notification is performed. A gaming machine that executes the notification effect in a second notification mode different from the mode may be used.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of (2), it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state and to improve the effect of the presentation by the hold display. In addition, it is possible to promote the launch of a game ball by the player.

[Modification 1]
It is possible to change the display mode of the hold display and the active display based on the total number of the hold storage being a specific number, and the hold storage means has more than the reference number (for example, 4 or more) of hold storage information. When a variable display is started when it is memorized and an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) is obtained (when a display result of variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit display result, etc.)) When the stored information of less than the reference number (for example, less than 4) is stored, the variable display is started and the advantageous state (big hit gaming state etc.) is entered (the display result of the variable display is the specific display result ( Whether or not an effect is performed in an advantageous state or an execution mode (for example, an execution ratio or an execution mode of a notification effect shown in FIG. 12) may be varied depending on whether or not a big win display result is obtained. The reference number and the specific number may be the same number (for example, eight).

  For example, when the variable display is started and the advantageous state is reached when the storage information of the reference number or more (for example, 4 or more) is stored, the storage information of less than the reference number (for example, less than 4) is obtained. A special girl image 221 or a special boy image 222 that is not displayed when the variable display is started and an advantageous state is obtained may be displayed. In addition, for example, there is a special C mode that is different from the A mode and the B mode (for example, a third notification image (not shown) is displayed at the center of the screen every 250 multiples in the C mode), and the reference number. When the above-described (for example, four or more) pieces of reserved storage information are stored, when the variable display is started and an advantageous state is obtained, the reserved storage information less than the reference number (for example, less than four) is stored. The ratio at which the C mode can be selected may be higher than when the variable display is started and an advantageous state is obtained.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first modification, attention can be paid to the number of the stored storage information and the launch of the game ball can be promoted. Moreover, the interest of the game in an advantageous state can be improved.

[Modification 2]
It is possible to change the display mode of the hold display and active display based on the total number of stored memories being a specific number, and when it becomes an advantageous state (for example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol) Or when the fanfare effect is started or the like, the number of reserved storage information stored in the storage unit is stored (for example, a reference number (for example, four) or more). Depending on whether or not the execution of the effect in the advantageous state or the execution mode (for example, the execution ratio or execution mode of the notification effect shown in FIG. 12) may be different. The reference number and the specific number may be the same number (for example, eight).

  For example, when the stored information of the reference number or more (for example, 4 or more) is stored when the advantageous state is reached, the reserved storage information of less than the reference number (for example, less than 4) is stored when the advantageous state is achieved. A special girl image 221 or a special boy image 222 that is not displayed when is stored may be displayed. Also, for example, when the stored information of the reference number or more (for example, 4 or more) is stored when the advantageous state is achieved, the rate at which the above-described C mode can be selected is increased. Good.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second modification, attention can be paid to the number of the stored storage information, and the launch of the game ball can be promoted even after reaching the reach state. Moreover, the interest of the game in an advantageous state can be improved.

  As mentioned above, although each embodiment of 1st Embodiment-6th Embodiment was described, in each embodiment, the variation pattern which shows variation modes, such as a variation time, the kind of reach production, the presence or absence of a pseudo | simulation continuation, is used for production control. In order to notify the microcomputer 100, an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted when variation starts is shown. However, the variation pattern is notified to the production control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. It may be. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching reach (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is not connected to another board (for example, FIG. 26). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped according to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it applies to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media, and a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses game media such as the above and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st starting winning port 14, 17 2nd starting winning port 18c Total pending storage display unit 18d Active display unit 20 Special variable winning unit Ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
200 Distribution Device 213 First Notification Image 214 Second Notification Image 560 Microcomputer for Game Control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different advantages,
Accumulating storage means for accumulating and storing information relating to the number of game media granted during the advantageous state;
Based on the fact that the information related to the number of game media stored in the cumulative storage means has become the specific information, the specific information has become the specific information in a mode that does not include a mode for notifying the gaming state after the end of the advantageous state. and notification effect means for executing the notification effect of notifying that,
Hold storage means for storing information relating to variable display as hold storage information;
A hold display means for performing a hold display corresponding to the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means;
Change means capable of changing the display mode of the hold display;
With
The changing means is
Based on the fact that a specific number of on-hold storage information is stored in the on-hold storage means, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first mode or the second mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode is specified. Can change to
The display mode of the hold display displayed by the second mode can be changed to the specific mode at a higher rate than the hold display displayed by the first mode,
The notification production means is
When the advantageous state is controlled to the first advantageous state, the information effect relating to the number of game media stored in the cumulative storage means becomes the specific information, so that the notification effect according to the first notification mode is executed. ,
When the second advantageous state, which is different from the first advantageous state, is controlled, the information related to the number of game media stored in the cumulative storage means becomes the specific information, so that the first notification mode is A gaming machine that executes the notification effect according to a different second notification mode.

Images